ADS-B AX 680 Part1 HW EN 10.13

Reference No.
83140 56224
Edition 10.13
PDM Reference No. 8314056224-EN-104
PDM Version B
MAGS
Multilateration and ADS-B
Ground Surveillance
Technical Manual
ADS-B Hardware AX 680
Part 1
Description, Operation and Maintenance
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

documentation supplied with each equipment prevails
All rights reserved

E 2013
Thales Electronic Systems GmbH
Stuttgart
Printed in Germany
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAGS ADS-B Hardware AX 680
Description, Operation and Maintenance Information
STRUCTURE OF THE TECHNICAL MANUALS
The MAGS Technical Manuals contain the complete description and operation of all MAGS system
components, i.e. the AX 680 Ground Stations, the RCMS/LCMS and, depending on the current MAGS
configuration, the servers CPS and CMS-S. They describe the functions, the subsystems and the
set-up of the components.
The MAGS Technical Manuals consists of different parts:
Part Technical Manual Reference no.

1 ADS-B Hardware AX 680 83140 56224
Part 1 describes the hardware system architecture, subsystems,
hardware-based operation, installation and maintenance.
2 MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX 680 83140 56329
Part 2 describes the software-based operation, monitoring and
controlling of the MLAT and/or ADS-B system.
3 (opt.) Optional Customer-Specific Information 83140 56xxx
Part 3 is only available if project-specific product design ele
ments are featured.
The MAGS Technical Manuals Part 1 and 2 are to be considered as generic manuals, i.e. they de
scribe the standard hardware and software configurations and the referring options.
If requested/purchased, the optional Part 3 provides additional customer-specific information,
i.e. it describes system elements, which have involved project-specific product design activities.
In the System Design Document (SDD) of your specific client project, you will find information
which manual information about subsystems and configurations apply to your project installation.
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS TO PART 1
The documents referenced to Part 1, mainly COTS supplier manuals, are provided in form of PDF files.
The referenced documents about safety topics provide additional general information about safe op
erating procedures.
[1] User Manual of ONLINE XANTO XS 1000R (option) / ONLINE USV-Systeme AG

[2] User Manual of ONLINE XANTO RT-series (option) / ONLINE USV-Systeme AG
[3] Installation Guide of 'Gigabit eco-friendly Ethernet Switches AT-GS-900/16' (option)/
Allied Telesis, Inc
[4] UPS Control Software WEB/SNMP MANAGER; CS121 Series (option)/ GENEREX GmbH
[5] Installation Manuals for ADS-B RX/TX antennas and GPS antennas (options) / Thales
[6] Guidelines on Safe Operating Procedures
Confederation of Aerial Industries Limited (CAI); The Aerial and Satellite Industry
[7] General Mounting and Grounding Instructions for EMP protectors / Huber & Suhner AG
[8] MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX 680 Manual, for reference number see table above (Part 2)
Ed. 10.13 Info-1

ADS-B Hardware AX 680 MAGS
Information Description, Operation and Maintenance
LEGAL NOTICE
Exchange only with the Thales-approved part
This Thales product and the contained COTS subsystems are in conformity with the necessary safety
requirements. To ensure the safe use and operation of all products, the information in the relevant
documentation about installation and operation must be observed.
However, Thales cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the safety requirements result
ing from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Thales option
subsystems or spare parts.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
The documents referenced to Part 1, mainly COTS supplier manuals, are provided in form of PDF files.
The referenced documents about safety topics provide additional general information about safe op
erating procedures.
REVISION HISTORY
PDM Manual Major Modifications

Version Edition
A 06.13 New Type of safety messages according ot ISO IEC
B 10.13 Antenna Installation added,
DSO description added
Info-2 Ed. 10.13

GENERAL
As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the documentation supplied with each equip
ment prevails. Despite of careful editing work technical inaccuracies and printing faults cannot be excluded
in this publication. Change of text remains reserved without notification.
Thales reserves the right to make design changes, additions to improvements in its products without obligation
to install such in products previously manufactured or installed.
TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND HANDLING REPLACEMENT PARTS

Subassemblies and components which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns must be packed in
a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to use the original packing, e.g. of the spare
part, or a comparable packing in corresponding performance to ensure a safe shipping of defective subassem
blies or components. For technical support and information on how to order or send back replacement parts,
contact your equipment provider listed below.
Germany: Thales Electronic Systems GmbH
Lilienthalstraße 2
70825 Korntal-Münchingen Germany
Tel: +49 711 86032-151
Fax: +49 711 86032-804
Italy: Thales Italia SPA
Via E. Mattei, 1
20064 Gorgonzola (MI) Italy
Tel: +39 02 95095-405
Fax: +39 02 95095-331
United States: Thales ATM Inc.
23501 West 84th Street
Shawnee, Kansas 66227 USA
Tel: +1 913 422-2600
Fax: +1 913 422-2962
LIMITATION OF USE
The use of this manual is limited to the operation and maintenance of the system stated in the title page. It shall
not be used for purposes of product manufacture. The installation drawings in the manuals, e.g. foundations
and site drawings are for information only. The as-built engineering drawings for the site are the only one to
be used. The information in the technical manuals is thought to be used by skilled workers to install the antenna
and perform the related electrical and mechanical adjustments. The leader of the installation team should be
an engineer, technician or experienced master craftsmen. Special training and initiation by Thales are urgently
recommended. The fitters should be trained craftsmen, for example mechanics, electricians or locksmiths.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work safety or
operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times. The purpose of safe
ty precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be heeded. Station shutdown due
to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of any work which may require opera
tion of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national regulations. Further information due to system
handling is contained in the correspondent sections.
COPYRIGHT
Reproduction of this manual is not permitted without written authorization of Thales.
TRADEMARKS
WINDOWS is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. All other mentioned product names may be trade
marks of the respective manufacturers and must be observed.
Ed. 10.13 Info-3

Information Description, Operation and Maintenance
This page is intentionally left blank.
Info-4 Ed. 10.13

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This Part 1 of the Technical Manual contains the description, operation and maintenance of the
ADS-B AX 680 Hardware divided into the following chapters (filed in the given registers):
1 System Description
2 Subsystem Description
3 Installation and Setup
4 Maintenance, Fault Location and Repair
AUDIENCE
This technical manual is intended for system operators and service technicians who have knowledge
of electronics and network technology. Some installation and maintenance tasks require basic knowl
edge of Linux and PC handling. Installation and maintenance should be performed by experienced
technicians only. New users are recommended to attend a Thales Training Course.
SAFETY NOTICES
This manual contains safety notices (differentiated according to the degree of danger) which are to
be observed, to ensure your personal safety and prevent property damage.
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions
! WARNING
are not taken.
! CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if
proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if
proper precautions are not taken.
ATTENTION indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding
information is not taken into account.
TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS
This Technical Manual uses the following typographic conventions:
- Names of keyboard keys or soft keys are written within quotation marks (e.g. 'OK'). Two keys con
nected by a plus sign (+) within quotation marks indicate short cut keys (e.g. 'Ctrl+C').
- Names of windows, pull-down menus, submenus, menu items and functions are written within
quotation marks (e.g. 'Data').
- Text to be entered by user (via keyboard) is within double quotation marks (e.g. ”d:\setup”).
- Variables are written within less than/greater than signs (e.g. <site name>).
- File names and directory paths are written in italics (e.g. /usr/local/bin/configuration.sh).
- Commands are written in Courier fonts (e.g. mount /dev/cdrom /media)
Ed. 10.13 A
List of Effective Pages Description, Operation and Maintenance
TABLE OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Basic edition: 12.11 / Revised version: 10.13
Pages Ed. Remarks
Title 10.13
Info-1 to 4 10.13
A to B 10.13
I to VIII 10.13
AV 1 to 8 10.13
1-1 to 24 10.13
2-1 to 52 10.13
3-1 to 68 10.13
4-1 to 62 10.13
B Ed. 10.13
Description, Operation and Maintenance Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Major Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.1 Electronic Processing in the Ground Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.2.2 Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.3 ADS-B Signal Flow and External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.2.4 Equipment Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.2.4.1 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Examples 19” Cabinet 24HU; Indoor . 1-10
1.2.4.2 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Example 19” Cabinet 24HU, Outdoor 1-13
1.2.4.3 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Example 19” Cabinet 10HU . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3.1 Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3.2 Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
1.3.3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.3.4 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3.5 Ground Station Data - AX 680 SPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3.6 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3.7 Conformity and Licensing Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.4 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.1 Observation of Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.2 Safety and Product Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.3 Work Safety in Outdoor Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.4 Work Safety at Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.5 Maintenance Operation at the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.6 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1.4.7 Safe Usage of Lithium Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.4.8 Safe Usage of UPS Battery Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.4.9 Risks of Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.4.10 Observation of Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1.4.10.1 Safety Requirements for the Use of Backup Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.4.11 Battery Gas Ventilation of the Outdoor Cabinet (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.4.11.1 Sources of Battery Gas Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.4.11.1.1 Ventilation of the Battery Station Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.4.11.1.2 Environment of the Battery Station Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1.4.12 General Instructions on Package Material Handling and Unpacking . . . . . . 1-23
Ed. 10.13 I
Table of Contents Description, Operation and Maintenance
1.4.13 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Statements . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

CHAPTER 2 SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT AX 680 (SPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 Signal Processing Board (SPB3), Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.2.1 SPB3, Receiver Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.1.2.2 SPB3, Signal Processing Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2.3 SPB3, Computer Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.1.2.4 SPB3, Definition of Front Panel Connectors J1 to J8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.1.2.5 SPB3, Definition of Front Panel Indicators and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.1.2.6 SPB3, Variants of Front Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.1.3 Position and Time Module 1 (PTM1), Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.1.4 Position and Time Module 2 (PTM2), Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.1.5 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.1.6 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT OF THE ADS-B AX 680 FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.1 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto XS 1000R (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.2.2 XS 1000R (Option), Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.2.2.1 XS 1000R Operating Display Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.2.2 Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.2.3 USB Communication Interfaces (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.2.4 RS232 Communication Interface (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.2.5 Slot for Interface Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.2.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto RT1000/RT2000 (Option) . . . . . 2-21
2.2.3.1 Controls and Indicators Control Unit and Pin Assignment SNMP Board . 2-22
2.2.4 Rack Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.2.4.1 19” Cabinet Options 24HU and 10HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.2.5 AT-GS900/16 Unmanaged Gigabit Ethernet Switch (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.2.6 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.2.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.2.6.2 Eco-Friendly Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.2.6.3 Green Power Saving Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.2.6.4 AC Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.2.6.5 RJ45 Twisted Pair Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
2.3 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.3.1 ADS-B / MLAT Optional Antennas, Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.3.2 Omni 030; 3 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option) . . . . . . . 2-31
2.3.3 Omni 060; 6 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option) . . . . . . . 2-32
2.3.4 Omni 115, 11.5 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option) . . . . 2-32
II Ed. 10.13
2.3.5 Hemi 100; 10 dBi Hemispherical ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option) . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.6 Sector 160; 16 dBi Sectorial High Performance Antenna (option) . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.7 GPS Antenna (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.8 Optional Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) with Mounting Set and
Weather Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.4 REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (RCMS/LCMS) . . . . 2-36
2.5 SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE 48 VDC GROUND STATION (OUTDOOR) . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.5.1 MacLean Air Conditioner (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.5.1.1 Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.5.2 Ethernet Switch (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.5.3 TCP/IP Adapter (or SNMP Adapter) (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5.4 48 V DC Power Supply System MFR Benning (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.5.5 Slimline Rectifier 1500 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.6 Slimline Control (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.6.1 Remote Monitoring System MCU (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.7 PowerSafe 12V170FS Monobloc Battery (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.5.7.1 Battery Temperature Sensor (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.7.2 Storage Conditions and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2.5.7.3 Storage Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.7.4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.7.5 Deep Discharge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.5.7.6 Recharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.7.7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.5.8 Separate Test Transponder Equipment (TT), Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Weather Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.3 Required Times for Installation and Maintenance Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.4 Hardware Items for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.1.5 Hardware Items for RCMS Installation and LCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.6 ADS-B System Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.1.7 Ground Station System Cabling Set Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.1.8 Interconnection of ADS-B Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.1.8.1 Example Configuration with Core Unit AX 680 SPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.1.8.2 System Configuration in the Small 19” Cabinet (10 HU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1.8.3 System Configuration in the Medium Standard 19” Cabinet (24HU) . . . . 3-10
Ed. 10.13 III

3.1.9 Installation Cabling of the 48 V DC Ground Station Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.1.10 Mounting Requirements and Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.1.10.1 Installation Notes to Ground Station (SPU) and Antenna Amplifier Unit . . 3-18
3.1.10.2 Installing, Commissioning and Configuring the optional UPS Battery
XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.1.10.3 Installing the Indoor Equipment of the Ground Station (SPU and TXU) . . 3-19
3.1.10.4 Installing the Cabling within the Shelter or Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.10.5 Installing the SPU Power Supply (AC/DC Converter, DC/DC Converter) . 3-20
3.1.10.6 Installing the MAGS RF Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.1.10.7 Rx(/Tx) Antenna Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.1.10.8 Important Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.1.10.9 Coaxial Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.1.10.10 Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.1.10.11 Position Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.1.10.12 Minimum Requirements for Communication Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.1.11 Placement Criteria and Installation of the GPS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.1.11.1 Multipath Effects on GPS Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.1.12 GPS Antenna - Mechanical Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3.1.12.1 Installing the Power and ETH Network Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.1.12.2 Installing the Fiber-Optical Network Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.1.12.3 Installing and Cabling of the Outdoor Cabinet, Mounting Cover Sheet . . 3-42
3.1.13 Installing the Optional Backup Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.1.14 Battery Safety Label on the GS Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.1.15 Work Safety Precautions for Installation and Maintenance Works . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.1.16 Fastener Kit for Battery Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.1.17 Installing the Backup Batteries (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3.1.17.1 Check of Ground Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3.1.17.2 Final Installation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
3.2 SWITCHING ON THE GROUND STATION ON SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.1 Status of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.2 Status of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), Startup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.2.3.1 Configuration of SNMP-Card 'DW5SNMP30' (CS121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.2.4 Switching On the Ground Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
3.2.5 Initial Ground Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
3.2.5.1 Use of LCMS USB Port for Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.2.6 Preparing the SPB3 Serial Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.2.7 Connection of the GS to the MAGS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.3 STARTING THE CENTRAL PROCESSING STATION (CPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
IV Ed. 10.13
3.3.1 Status of the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

3.3.2 Status of the CPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.3.3 Switch on the CPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.4 STARTING THE CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.4.1 Status of the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.4.2 Status of the CMS-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.4.3 Switch on the CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.5 STARTING THE RCMS AT REMOTE SITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.6 HARDWARE-BASED GS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.6.1 Basic Concept of Ground Station Operation by Hardware / Software . . . . . 3-59
3.6.2 Status of GS Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.6.3 Status of Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
3.6.4 UPS Xanto RT1000 or RT2000 (Option), Startup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.6.5 UPS Xanto XS 1000R (Option), Startup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.6.5.1 Starting the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
3.6.5.2 Starting the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R in Battery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.6.5.3 Shutting Down the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.6.6 19” Indoor Cabinets, Setup of Environmental Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
3.7 SITE VERIFICATION TEST PROCEDURE AND INSTALLATION REPORT . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.1 Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.2 Mechanical Setup of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.2.1 ADS-B RX Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.2.2 Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU), Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.2.3 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3.7.3 Electrical Connection of AX 680 SPU, AAU and active GPS RX Antenna . . . 3-64
3.7.4 RF Properties of Antenna Cables and Receiver adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.7.5 Check if Ground Station is Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.7.6 Network Connection to RCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.7.7 Site Installation Report (SIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
3.8 SITE INSTALLATION REPORT (SIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Introduction to Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2 General Safety Precautions for Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.2.1 Site-Specific Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.3 Work on Equipment Sensitive to Electrostatic Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.3.1 Exchanging Lithium Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Ed. 10.13 V
4.2.1 Damage Check/Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.2.2 Data Log of ADS-B or MAGS System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.3 Checking the Transmitter Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.4 Checking the Receiver Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.5 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.5.1 Cleaning the Dust Filter Mat of the Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.6 Preventive Exchange of Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.7 Preventive Exchange of the Lithium Battery in the RCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.8 Maintenance of the Optional UPS Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.8.1 Care and Maintenance of the Optional UPS Systems/Batteries . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.8.2 Storing the Optional UPS Systems/Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.8.3 When to Replace Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.8.4 Replacing Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.8.5 Replacing the Internal Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.8.6 Replacing the Battery Module of UPS Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.8.7 Testing the New Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.8.8 Disposing of Old Batteries or UPS Xanto XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.9 UPS Troubleshooting for Xanto RT Series Battery Pack (Option) . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.2.10 Exchanging the UPS (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.10.1 Exchanging UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 incl. Internal Battery
(Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.2.10.1.1 Exchanging the Internal Battery of UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 . . . . 4-16
4.2.10.2 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT2000 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.10.3 Exchanging the UPS Xanto RT2000 Battery Pack (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.2.10.4 Exchanging the Optional SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121) . . . . 4-18
4.2.11 Configuration of SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.11.1 Setup and Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.2.11.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.2.11.2.1 Settings of Model & System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.11.2.2 Settings of the Network&Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.2.11.2.3 Settings of SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.11.2.4 Settings of COM2&AUX, TempMan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.2.11.2.5 Save Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.2.11.3 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.2.11.4 Reconfigure the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.2.12 Maintenance Recommendations for Lightning/EMP Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.2.12.1 Quarter-Wave Lightning/EMP Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.2.12.2 Gas Discharge Tube (GDT) Lightning/EMP Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.2.12.3 Lightning/Surge Protector Gas Capsule Test Set (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.3 FAULT LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
VI Ed. 10.13
4.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4.3.2 Power Supply, Subsystem Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.3.3 Troubleshooting UPS Subsystem XS 1000R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.3.3.1 Typical Warning and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.3.4 Performing Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.3.4.1 Troubleshooting Software-Monitored Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.3.4.1.1 GPS Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.3.4.1.2 TX Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.3.4.1.3 Fault in the RF Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.3.4.2 Tests if no Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.2.1 If on Site: Check cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.2.2 Check Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.3 Tests if no Raw Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.3.1 Check Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.3.2 Check Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.3.4.4 Tests if no Asterix Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.3.4.4.1 Check Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.3.4.4.2 Check Input Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.4 REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.2 Safety Precautions for Repair Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.2.1 General Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.3 Replacing Subsystems and Individual Subassemblies (LRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.4.3.1 Replacing Fuses of SPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.4.4 Replacing Cables of SPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.4.5 Specific Procedures for SPU Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.4.5.1 Exchanging the SPB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.4.5.2 Exchanging the PTM1 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.4.6 Exchanging the PTM2 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.4.6.1 Exchanging the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.4.6.2 Exchanging the Fan Unit of SPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.4.7 Exchanging the Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.4.7.1 Exchanging the RX Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.4.7.2 Exchanging the GPS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.4.7.3 Exchanging the RCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.4.7.4 UPS Troubleshooting (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4.4.8 Exchanging the UPS (Xanto RT1000 or Xanto RT2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.4.8.1 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 incl. Internal Battery . . . 4-43
4.4.8.1.1 Exchanging the Internal Battery of UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 . . . . . 4-44
Ed. 10.13 VII

4.4.8.2 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

4.4.8.3 Exchanging UPS Xanto RT2000 Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.4.8.4 Exchanging the Optional SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121) . . . . 4-46
4.4.9 Configuring the SNMP Card 'DW5SNMP30' (CS121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.4.9.1 Setup and Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.4.9.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.4.9.2.1 Settings of Model & System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.4.9.2.2 Settings of the Network&Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.4.9.2.3 Settings of SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.4.9.2.4 Settings of COM2 & AUX, TempMan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.4.9.2.5 Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.4.9.3 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.4.9.4 Reconfiguring the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.4.10 CS121 WDP - Watchdog & Power Manager (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.4.11 List of DIP-FIX-Switches and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.4.11.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.5 DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE (DSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.5.1 DSO Part on the SPB3 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.5.1.1 Software-Based Operation of the DSO Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.5.1.2 DSO Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4.5.1.3 Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.5.1.4 DSO Feature List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
VIII Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance List of Abbreviations
ABKÜRZUNGSVERZEICHNIS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
LISTE D'ABREVIATIONS
LISTA DE ABREVIATURAS
AAU Antenna Amplifier Unit
Amplificateur d'antenne
Antennenverstärkereinheit
AC Alternating Current
Courant alternatif
Wechselstrom
AC21 ASTERIX data ReCord tool
Outil d'enregistrement d'états ASTERIX
ACT Activity
ADEV / TDEV Allan Deviation and Time Deviation
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast
Surveillance dépendante automatique en mode diffusion
AP21 ASTERIX data RePlay tool
Outil de lecture d'états ASTERIX
ASU Antenna switching unit
Ensemble de commutation d'antennes
ASTERIX All purpose STructured Eurocontrol suRveillance Information eXchange
Tous les échanges d'informations relatifs à la coordination en surveillance au
format d'Eurocontrol
ATC Air Traffic Control
Contrôle du trafic aérien
ATM Air Traffic Management
ATTPULSE Pulse-level Attenuation
BIT, BITE Built-In Test, Built-In Test Equipment
Equipement test intégré
BIOS Basic Input/Output System
BCB Battery Control Board
Carte contrôle batterie
BDS Data Selector Code (for Comm-B)
BIB Battery Integration Board
Carte batterie
BMC Baseboard Management Controller
BTB Battery Module Box
Module batterie
C Capacity (battery)
Capacité
C&M Control & Monitoring
Contrôle et surveillance
CA Conflict Alert
CD Compact Disk
Cat, CAT Category
Catégorie
COTS Commercial Off The Shelf
Composants de commerce
Ed. 10.13 AV-1

List of Abbreviations Description, Operation and Maintenance
CMS Control and Monitoring System

Système de contrôle et de surveillance
CPR Compact Position Reporting
Rapport de position compact
CPU Central Processing Unit
Unité centrale
CPS Central Processing Station
Station centrale de traitement
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
Contrôle de redondance cyclique
CSAPP Central Station APPlication
CVDD Configuration Version Description Document
D/C Drop/Collision
DC Direct Current
Courant continu
Gleichstrom
DEL Diode électroluminescente (see also 'LED')
DF Downlink Format
Format de liaison descendante
DGPS Differential Global Position System
DOP Dilution Of Precision
Affaiblissement de la précision
DSL Digital Subscriber Link
DSO Digital Storage Oscilloscope
DVD Digital Versatile Disk
ECT External earthing connection
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ES Extended Squitter
Squitter (déclenchement erratique) long
ESH Earthing screw of the housing
ETH Ethernet
ft feet
pied
FDDI Fibre Distributed Digital Infrastructure
FDX Full-Duplex
FL Flight Level
FO Fiber-Optical
FOM Figure Of Merit
Facteur de mérite de précision
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
Réseau de portes programmables in-situ
FW Firmware
GB Giga Byte
Giga-octet (Go)
GDT Gas Discharge Tube
GICB Ground Initiated Comm-B
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS Global Positioning System
Système de positionnement mondial
AV-2 Ed. 10.13

GS Ground Station
Station terrestre (ST)
Bodenstation
GS-R Ground Station Receive-only
GS-T Ground Station Transmit/Receive
GS-T(I) Ground Station Transmit/Receive (Interrogate)
GS-T(C) Ground Station Transmit/Receive (Calibrate)
GSSYNC Ground Station Time Synchronization Daemon
GTK Gimp Tool Kit
Boîte à outils Gimp
GTS GPS Timing System
Système de synchronisation GPS
GUI Graphical User Interface
Interface utilisateur graphique
HDX Half-Duplex
HMI Human-Machine-Interface
HPL Horizontal Protection Level
Niveau de protection horizontal
HU Height Unit
HxWxD Height x Width x Depth
HW Hardware
Matériel
I-ADSBTR ADS-B Target Report Interface
I-CM Control&Monitoring Interface
I-CONF Configuration Interface
I-DTD Date and Time Distribution Interface
I-LM Local Maintenance Interface
I-LOG Logging Interface
I-RD Raw Data Interface
I-SSSR Service/Sensor Status Report Interface
I-TDOR Target Data Output Peport Interface
I/O Input / Output
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organisation
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IDD Interface Design Description
IERS International Earth Rotation and Reference System Services
IP Internet Protocol
IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface
Interface de gestion intelligente de matériel
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
KB Kilo Byte (1024 bit)
Kilo-octets (1024 bits) (Ko)
L/A Link/Activity
LAN Local Area Network
Réseau local
LAT Latitude
LC Local Control
LCMS Local Control and Monitoring System
Système de surveillance et de contrôle local
Ed. 10.13 AV-3

LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LED Light Emitting Diode
Diode électroluminescente (DEL)
Leuchtdiode
LINUX-HA Linux High Availability
LMW Log Message Window
Fenêtre des messages enregistrés
LNA Low Noise Amplifier

Amplificateur à faible bruit
LON Longitude
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MAC Media Access Control (address; Ethernet)
MAGS Multilateration and ADS-B Ground Surveillance
MB Mega Byte
Méga-octet (Mo)
Mbit Megabit
MEARTS Microprocessor En Route Automated Radar Tracking System
MHz Mega Hertz
MIB Management Information Base
Base de données
MLAT Multilateration
MMS ID Mode S address Identification
MOV Metal oxide varistor
MTSC Master Technical System Control
Contrôle système technique principal
n. a. not applicable
non applicable
NC No Change
NIC Network Interface Card
NiMH Nickel-metal hydride (battery type)
NM Nautical Miles
Miles marins
Nautische Meilen
NTA Network Terminal Adapter
NTP Network Time Protocol
Protocole NTP
NTPD Network Time Protocol Daemon
Démon NTP
NVRAM Non-Volatile RAM
Mémoire vive non volatile
OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator
OS Operating System
Système d'exploitation
Betriebssystem
OVP Overvoltage Protection
PA Position Accuracy
PAM-FRA Precision Approach Monitoring Frankfurt
AV-4 Ed. 10.13

PC Personal Computer
Ordinateur personnel
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PCS Production Series number
PDOP Position Dilution of Precision
Position, Dilution de précision
PE Protective Earth
Terre de protection
PHY Ethernet Physical Layer Transceiver
PI Proportional Integrative
PPS Pulse Per Second
Impulsion par seconde
PPS Precise Positioning Service
QR Quick response (code)
RAC Raw data ASTERIX Converter tool
Convertisseur ASTERIX de données brutes
RAM Random Access Memory
Mémoire vive
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
RCMS Remote Control and Monitoring System
Système de surveillance et de contrôle à distance
RF Radio Frequency
Radiofréquence
RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux
RMS Root Mean Square
RPM Red Hat Package Manager
Outil de gestion de packages Red Hat
RRC Raw data ReCord tool
Outil d'enregistrement de données brutes
RRP Raw data RePlay tool
RTCA Requirements and Technical Concepts for Aeronautics
RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime services
RX Receiver
Récepteur
Empfänger
RXB Receiver Module Box
Module récépteur
Empfängermodul
SAC System Area Code
Code de zone du système
SATA Serial Advanced Technology Attachment
SBC Single Board Computer
SCB System Control Board
Carte de contrôle de système
SCP Secure Copy Protocol
SCU System Communication Unit
SEL System Event Log
SIC System Identification Code
Code d'identification du système
Ed. 10.13 AV-5

SIS Signal In Space

Signal dans le temps
SM Site Monitor
Dispositif de surveillance du site
SMA System Monitoring Agent
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

Protocole de gestion de réseau simple
SPB Signal Processing Board
Carte de traitement du signal
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SPT Spamming Tree Protocol
SPU Signal Processing Unit
Unité de traitement du signal
SSH Secure Shell
SSR Secondary Surveillance Radar
SSRCP SSR Code Pattern
SSRCS SSR Code Single
ST Ground Station (GS)
Station terrestre (ST)
Bodenstation
SW Software
Logiciel
T-RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
TCAS Traffic Alert and Traffic Avoidance System
TCL/TK Tool Command Language / Tool Kit
Langue de commande d'outil / Boîte à outils
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDOA Time Difference Of Arrival
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TIS-B Traffic Information Services-Broadcast
Services d'informations sur la circulation aérienne en mode diffusion
TMA Terminal Manoeuvring Area
TOA Time Of Arrival
TOD Time Of Day
TOT Time Of Transmission
TSC Technical System Control
Commande système technique
TSD Technical Situation Display
Affichage de la situation technique
TSS Technical System Supervisor
TT Test Transmitter
TTL Time To Live
TTT Time To Transmit
TXID Transmission Identifier
TXSTAT Transmission Status
TX Transmitter
Emetteur
Sender
AV-6 Ed. 10.13

TXB Transmitter Module Box

Module émetteur
Sendermodul
UAT Universal Access Transceiver
UATL UAT Long
UATS UAT Short
UDP/IP User Datagram Protocol / Internet Protocol
Protocole UDP / Protocole Internet
UI User Interface
Interface utilisateur
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
Dispositif d'alimentation sans coupure
USM/VACM User Security and View-based Access Models
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
UTC Universal Time Co-ordinated
VAC Volts AC
Volts CA
VDC Volts DC
VDL VHF Data Link
Liaison de données VHF
VDOP Vertical Dilution of Precision
Dilution de précision vertical
VHF Very High Frequency
Très haute fréquence
VM Virtual Machine
Machine virtuelle
VIS Vehicle Identification System
VPN Virtual Private Network
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
WAM Wide Area Multilateration
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
XML eXtended Markup Language
Ed. 10.13 AV-7

AV-8 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance System Description
CHAPTER 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.1 FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLE
ADS-B is a data link application or principle that makes use of navigational data that are available
onboard an aircraft. Aircraft avionics permanently determines the aircraft's navigational position and
movement vector. Most aircraft are also equipped with a flight management system that guides the
aircraft along waypoints programmed by the pilot.
The principle of ADS-B refers to making t his information available by means of an automatic broad
cast via digital data link. ADS-B is an acronym for Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast:
Automatic no human intervention is required,
Dependent the surveillance solution is not determined by the observer, but provided by the
observed object
Surveillance data provided include position, velocity vector etc.
Broadcast transmitted without external trigger (e.g. interrogation) without any specific addressee
This broadcast information may be received and processed by other aircraft or ground systems for
use in improved situational awareness, conflict avoidance and airspace management. Three ADS-B
data link technologies are emerging as possible contenders - namely, Universal Access Transceiver
(UAT), VHF Data Link (VDL) Mode 4 and 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (Mode S data link). The interna
tional civil aviation organization ICAO has recommended to use the 1090 MHz (Mode S) data link as
global data link technology for ADS-B purposes. The other two data links are seen only for regional
applications. Fig. 1-1 shows the system and its components in an example view.
GPS Satellites
Aircraft
ADS-B 1090 ES
RX GPS RX RX GPS RX RX GPS RX RX GPS RX
ADS-B GS-R GS-R GS-R GS-R

Ground Stations (GS)
Receive only Receive only Receive only Receive only
Ground Network
Ground Station Data

ADS-B operational data
Maintenance data
ATC ATC
RCMS 1 RCMS 2 optional
ADS-B LAN A ADS-B LAN A

ADS-B LAN B ADS-B LAN B
ATC Center ATC Center
Fig. 1-1 System overview ADS-B (configuration example)
Ed. 10.13 1-1

System Description Description, Operation and Maintenance
1.1.1 Applications
Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B) is a surveillance technology that uses posi
tion information broadcast by aircraft as a basis for surveillance, rather than a radar scan to plot air
borne targets. Aircraft (or vehicles) equipped with ADS-B transponders broadcast information con
tinuously directly from the flight management system. This data is used to provide a very accurate
visual display containing information such as height, speed and identity, in a similar way to secondary
radar, but more detailed and comprehensive at a fraction of the cost. ADS-B offers other advantages
such as more frequent update rates and the potential to convey aircraft derived data such as spot
weather updates, aircraft intent and avionics data.
The ADS-B ground station receives Mode S ADS-B broadcasts (extended squitters) periodically
emitted by equipped aircraft. These messages contain information about the aircraft's current posi
tion, altitude, velocity vector, callsign, etc. The ground station provides the decoded data as standard
ASTERIX output via an attached network to ATC surveillance applications. The signal processing
techniques applied within the basic equipment (e.g. AX 680 SPU ground station) allow for reliable
operation even under heavy radio load conditions and long-range coverage. The usual application
is en-route surveillance with coverage ranges of up to 150 NM. Other applications are terminal area
surveillance and airport surface surveillance. The ADS-B system serves the following benefits:
- Reduced communication congestion
- Enhanced situational awareness and safety for pilots
- Reduced taxi/takeoff delays
- Expanded surveillance, also on airport surface
- Reduced cost
There are three kinds of ADS-B applications defined as follows:
a. Air-to-Air Applications
Receiving the ADS-B data, the pilot is enabled to actually see other aircraft in his vicinity. This Cockpit
Display of Traffic Information (CDTI) is the basic technology which enables the pilot to electronically
'see and avoid' other aircraft in a largely passive mode. Independent of ground based radar, CDTI
greatly enhances the pilot's situational awareness and leads to safer and more efficient airspace op
erations. ADS-B techniques also enhances Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS).
Example Data Sources Aircraft ADS-B Ground station ATC room

FMS
GPS GPS
INS Message Transmitter
ATC applications
Generator Mode S
NAV Enroute
Surveillance
Altitude
Message
Receiver A-SMGCS
Pilot Input Processor
Example Applications
Situation
Application n
Awareness Message Receiver
Processor
Free Flight
ASAS Aircraft
ADS-B Avionics ADS-B Avionics
Mode S
Fig. 1-2 ADS-B interaction with aircraft and ATC (example)
1-2 Ed. 10.13

b. Air-to-Ground Applications
ADS-B provides surveillance data to Air Traffic Controllers and/or aircraft operations facilities on the
ground. An aircraft in flight broadcasts its position, altitude, identification, and other pertinent informa
tion to ground stations that relay this data to Air Traffic Control or aircraft operations facilities. This
information is used to effectively establish surveillance in remote locations or extend or even replace
current surveillance capabilities. Air-to-Ground ADS-B greatly assists controllers and aircraft op
erations facilities with airspace management.
c. Ground-to-Ground Applications
ADS-B provides accurate position and identification of aircraft and other equipped vehicles for air
port surface surveillance. Aircraft and vehicles, if suitably equipped, broadcast information containing
position, speed, heading and identification to ground stations located around the airport. This infor
mation is relayed to air traffic controllers and airport management facilities personnel. Airport surface
surveillance enhanced through the ADS-B data link application leads to safer and more efficient air
port surface operations in all weather conditions.
1.1.2 Major Assemblies

The ADS-B represents a system that offers Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B)
services based on the 1090 ES SSR Mode S data link (1090 MHz). The AX 680 SPU builds the basic
equipment for a system to be integrated in an existing environment.
A complete ADS-B system consists of three main subsystems:
- AX 680 SPU
This is the basic subsystem to be installed at remote sites as ground station. It will be completed
by peripheral equipment such as antennas, UPS etc. Additionally, individual already configured
system versions implemented in an optional 19” cabinet are available.
- RCMS
The centralized Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS), to monitor, configure and control
an ADS-B ground station.
- Maintenance equipment (optional)
LCMS (Local Control and Monitoring System: Laptop); set of spare parts
high gain RX antenna
GPS antenna
AX 680 Signal Processing Unit (SPU) 19” rack

LCMS
Local Monitoring
ATC room communication network
RCMS Configuration
(remote)
to connector NET1, rear
mains supply, external
Ethernet RF in
ADS-B communication network RF cable, 1/4” cellflex, up to 10 m
RF in
AAU (opt.)
RF out RF cable, 1/2” cellflex, up to 30 m up to 2 m
Test transmission (optional)
Fig. 1-3 Ground Station, basic system components (example)
Ed. 10.13 1-3

Usually two ADS-B ground station subsystems (GS A and GS B) are installed at one remote site.
The subsystems are supplied by either standard DC voltage (nominal 24 VDC) or optional mains volt
age (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz). The DC voltage may be generated by solar powered DC generators.
The basic ground station configuration comprises the following components (Fig. 1-4):
- Signal Processing Unit (AX 680 SPU); can be individually configured with optional components
- ADS-B RX antenna, diverse model options
- Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU), diverse configurations, optional
- GPS RX antenna, optional
- Cables and accessories
Some options can be added according to customer requirements, e.g.:
- Uninterruptable Power Supply system (UPS) which buffers the operation of the GS in case of
a mains power fail, used e.g. in the already configured systems.
- An independent test transmitter device within the SPU offers radiation of test signals via the inte
grated antenna probes of the RX antenna. It thus allows testing of the antenna continuity monitor
ing.
ADS-B receiving antenna

GPS antenna (optional)
Test Transmision (option) RX A RX B local connect.
to GS
RF Rx LCMS
AX 680 SPU Ground Station A Ground Station B

(option)
(option)
RCMS Configuration
(remote)
Power supply
(mains or DC)
AAU (option)
LAN
ETH network, external
Fig. 1-4 ADS-B ground station, basic equipment configuration, overview (example)
The Remote Control and Monitoring System (or optionally two, RCMS 1 and 2) is installed centrally
at the Air Traffic Controller building (ATC) at one or two dedicated sites. The RCMS system(s) are built
up with identical components which comprise as standard (Fig. 1-4):
- Personal Computer with dual TFT LCD monitor; Linux operating system
- Application software including:
S Monitoring and Control System (MTSC); Master Technical System Control with
Device Managers and Site Managers
S Raw data recording and replay tools, Asterix data recording/replay and conversion,
S ADS-B Technical Situation Display (TSD) with a display configuration tool.
The Local Control and Monitoring System (LCMS) is used for local operation and/or local mainte
nance purposes. It comprises a standard Laptop computer used as a data terminal including the ap
propriate application software. It is similar to the RCMS application.
The ground station is also available as a customized system, assembled in one of various 19” cabinet
options. Figs. 1-5 and 1-6 show examples of available ground station configurations.
1-4 Ed. 10.13

ADS-B RX antenna
ADS-B Ground Station AX 680 Exchange Panel
local connect.
RF TestTx to GS LCMS
RF Rx
(option)
RCMS Configuration
AX 680 SPU (remote)
GPS antenna
ETH network external
ETH internal
AAU (option)
SNMP
UPS (internal battery pack) LAN

19” cabinet, 10HU AC mains
Fig. 1-5 ADS-B system with one AX 680 and UPS in 19” cabinet 10HU, configuration example
ADS-B Ground Station AX 680 ADS-B RX antenna

Exchange Panel
RF TestTx1 RF TestTx1
RF Rx
Splitter
RF Rx
AX 680 SPU 1
GPS antenna1
ETH network external local connect.
RF TestTx2 RF TestTx2 to GS LCMS
RF Rx
AAU (option)
(option)
AX 680 SPU 2 RCMS Configuration

GPS antenna2
ETH network external Hub/Data Switch (remote)
ETH internal
SNMP
UPS 2 LAN
Battery pack 2 AC mains

ETH internal
SNMP
UPS 1
Battery pack 1
19” cabinet, 24HU
Fig. 1-6 ADS-B system with two AX 680 and UPS in 19” cabinet 24HU, configuration example
Ed. 10.13 1-5

ADS-B Ground Station AX 680 ADS-B RX antenna

Exchange Panel
RF TestTx1 RF TestTx1
RF Rx
Splitter
RF Rx
AX 680 SPU 1
GPS antenna1
ETH internal local connect.
RF TestTx2 RF TestTx2 to GS LCMS
RF Rx
AAU (option)
(option)
AX 680 SPU 2 RCMS Configuration

GPS antenna2
ETH internal (remote)
ETH internal
LAN
ETH switch
SNMP
AC mains
UPS control unit
UPS, battery pack 1
UPS, battery pack 2

19” cabinet, 24HU
Fig. 1-7 ADS-B system with two AX 680, switch and UPS in 24HU cabinet , config. example
1-6 Ed. 10.13

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Electronic Processing in the Ground Station
The ADS-B subsystem AX 680 SPU developed by Thales is a compact and autonomous unit based
on 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (ES) reception. The main function of the AX 680 SPU is to receive
and process ADS broadcasts on 1090 MHz, and to directly output decoded consistent target report
data to an ATC application using the international ASTERIX standard category 21 (ed. 0.23). Further
central equipment is not needed.
In order to output complete ASTERIX reports, data from different ADS-B reports (extended squitter
messages) of the same target are collected (e.g. position, velocity, etc.). The ground station process
ing makes sure that data derived from different extended squitter types are combined in a consistent
way. The AX 680 SPU includes internal and external Built-In-Test (BIT) functionality, which allows
optimizing the automatic and manual failure detection and identification process. The status as well
as all functions and parameters of the ground station can be monitored and controlled via the Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
The Ground Station application software runs on an embedded version of the operating system Linux
providing high robustness and flexibility for network communication and remote operation. Changes
in, or updates of the application can be performed while the Ground Station is operational and do not
require a reboot. Thus the system downtime is minimized. Remote upload of new software releases
as well as configuration files is handled in a secured and fail-safe way which is essential for true re
mote operation.
RX antenna GPS RX antenna
Communication network to ATC center/CPS/RCMS
operational data (Asterix Category 021)
AAU* maintenance data (SNMP)
option
Ground Station
Exchange panel (option) N RF N RJ45 Data N RF
SMA NET1 NET2 SMA
Test signal
to probe SPU
(option)
SPB3 Position and
Receiver Section Interface Time System
Test transmitter TX control PTM
option
Signal Processing Network

ETH
optional Computing/Control Interfaces
Interfaces (front) bus board

Power Supply
DC/DC option* F
DC out
Power Supply
TTout AC/DC
Fuses:
to NET2 Test F = 2x 3.2AT AC
Data (SNMP) transmission F = 2x 10AT DC F S1
**
TX control out TX control TX control
Uninterruptible rear (1090) rear (UAT)
local configuration
digital BITE status MAINT CONSOLE interface (V.24)
Power Supply I/O LCMS
UPS Status Interface Ethernet Maintenance
door lock switches etc. ETH Laptop
optional local maintenance
interface (Ethernet)
mains supply nom. 115/240 VAC (90 to 264 VAC)

* DC/DC converter can be used instead of AC/DC converter or both ** spare, not used mains via UPS or nom. 24 VDC (18 to 36 VDC), option
Fig. 1-8 Ground station AX 680, basic architecture with optional Position/Time Module (PTM)
Ed. 10.13 1-7

For remote operation (i.e. not integrated within an existing ATC network) the ground station can be
optionally equipped with a modem to bridge its external Ethernet interface over a telecommunication
line (e.g. ISDN, Fibre Optical Network, etc.). Standard is the Ethernet LAN communication.
The ground station equipment can be supplied with DC voltage (nom. 24 VDC), e.g. generated by
solar power, or optionally with AC from mains (nom. 115/240 VAC), using the AC/DC converter option.
The installation of the Ground Station equipment depends on the local customer requirements or fa
cilities. Existing buildings or shelters can be used for ground station siting. The ground station an
tenna can be mounted on top of or on the side of the existing structure (generally most ground station
positions at large airports are at or close to a building). The indoor ground station does not require
separate air-conditioning, only ventilation.
For those ground station sites not located near a building structure, an outdoor cabinet with appropri
ate air-conditioning is optionally available. The antenna is housed in a weatherproof radome and
does not need to be cooled or heated.
The Remote Control and Monitoring Systems (RCMS) may be installed centrally at the Air Traffic Con
troller building (ATC) at dedicated sites.
1.2.2 Hardware Architecture

The hardware architecture of a serviceable ground station is shown in Fig. 1-8. This exemplary con
figuration includes the following main components:
- 1 Signal Processing Unit (AX 680 SPU)
- 1 GPS antenna (option)
- 1 omnidirectional RX antenna
- 1 Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU), optional, which comprises a low-noise pre-amplifier (LNA) and
an RF filter and lightning protection to ensure a good signal-to-noise ratio at the input of the re
ception channel and to avoid losses due to the attenuation by antenna cables. It is powered via
the RF line from the ground station receiver.
The AAU assembly can be mounted on an appropriate mast. A low-loss cable (e.g. 1/2” cellflex),
with a required total maximum attenuation of < 4 dB, must be used for connecting the antenna
to the AAU, as well as the AAU to the equipment rack.
1.2.3 ADS-B Signal Flow and External Interfaces
The ground station has the following RF and analog signal interfaces:
- 1090 MHz RF input (antenna/receiver), DC supply to antenna amplifier selectable
- GPS signal RF input (antenna/receiver), DC supply to antenna amplifier selectable
- Test transmission output to test the multilateration and ADS-B performance (antenna continuity)
- TX control, a telegram generator output to drive a Mode S and Mode A/C interrogator transmitter
- Spare TX control connectors (rear, 1090/UAT), not used in this application
The signal information flow as well as the various intermediated states of processing that a ADS-B
ground station provides and the diagnostic interface are shown in Fig. 1-9.
1-8 Ed. 10.13

The ground station's communication interfaces are:

- Ethernet 10/100Base-T data link (NET1, NET2) for communication with the ADS-B network or
RCMS, or with GS additional equipment, e.g. NET2 to UPS
- Separate Ethernet 10/100Base-T (ETH1/MAINT), e.g. for maintenance purposes
- Separate Ethernet 10/100Base-T (ETH2), auxiliary interface
- A console port V.24 (MicroSubD) for local set up
Other interfaces are:
- A BITE I/O to accommodate BITE status summary from e.g. another (redundant) ground station
- A digital Status interface (I/O) to connect optionally BITE status of other systems, door lock
switches, smoke detectors, etc.
NOTE: The I/O port of the SPU/SPB3 board has only operational insulation and must only con
nect to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) as defined in IEC 60950. Connecting other than
SELV circuits can create hazards.
RX/TX antenna GPS antenna optional

optional
RF signal
GPS signal
Mode-S/A/C
RX signal
PTM
through GPS data Main
antenna probe Position and Time through
comm. network
SPU SNMP
Video signal
to processing Remote access (SNMP)
Network
section NET1 or NET2
ETH2 through
Test transmission* Ethernet interf. (aux.)
RF
*) in case of GS-T Maint through
Ethernet interface
RF signal
out
programming through
V.24 serial interface
Maintenance
SBP3 LCMS
RF signal RCMS
Fig. 1-9 Signal information flow of an ADS-B ground station (example)
Ed. 10.13 1-9

1.2.4 Equipment Configurations

The ADS-B ground station equipment and its options allow a number of individual configurations,
each based on the Signal Processing Unit AX 680 (SPU). The following show two configured systems,
which are examples for a completely configured and serviceable ADS-B ground station system.
1.2.4.1 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Examples 19” Cabinet 24HU; Indoor

The ADS-B equipment configuration assembled in the medium standard 19” cabinet (24HU) builds
a complete redundant ADS-B system. The configured system includes the following main compo
nents (other configurations can be defined according customer requirements):
2x Signal Processing Unit (AX 680 SPU) in a redundant configuration
2x Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), each dedicated to one AX 680 SPU
The 24HU cabinet is designed with a lockable front and rear door. It houses an intrusion switch, front
and rear, a key locked drawer, two eightfold AC sockets with fuses (rear side), one ninefold AC socket
(front side) and the necessary guides and cabling. An Exchange Panel at the rear provides easy ac
cess to connect the external interfaces (e.g. Ethernet). It provides a connector for mains supply in
cluding fuse switches and 4(4)/2 RF connectors to connect the VHF and GPS antenna signals. As
an option, an RF divider for the RX antenna signal can be mounted here. The cabinet bottom provides
rolls to move it and adjustable supports to park it.
The peripheral equipment used comprises 1 (or 2) omnidirectional ADS-B RX antenna for Mode S,
1 (or 2) optional Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) and 2 GPS antennas. Other configurations can be de
fined according customer requirements. With 1 VHF antenna and 2 AX 680 an RF splitter is used.
19” cabinet, 24HU, closed 19” cabinet, 24HU, open
Exchange panel
parking
support
wheel
Intrusion sensor, rear
Fig. 1-10 ADS-B configuration, assembled in a medium 19” cabinet (24HU), example
1-10 Ed. 10.13

19” cabinet, 24HU, assembled

front door open
blank panel
free to guide cables
SPU 1
blank panel

area for opt. hub or modem etc.
SPU 2*
drawer, key-locked*
UPS, basic unit 1*

(excl. battery pack)
UPS, battery pack 1*
UPS, basic unit 2*

(excl. battery pack)
power strip
blank panel
Intrusion sensor, front
* = option
parking support
Fig. 1-11 ADS-B indoor configuration, assembled in a medium 19” cabinet (24HU), example
Ed. 10.13 1-11

19” cabinet, 24HU, assembled 19” cabinet, 24HU, assembled

front door open rear door open
blank panel

SPU 1
power strip
SPU 2*
Ethernet switch*
drawer, key-locked
8 fold sockets
blank panel
UPS, base unit*
power strip
blank panel
intrusion sensor, front
parking support * = option
Fig. 1-12 ADS-B 19” cabinet, example
1-12 Ed. 10.13

1.2.4.2 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Example 19” Cabinet 24HU, Outdoor

The 24HU outdoor cabinet is equipped with an air conditioner built-in in the front door. The door
switch in the rear upper area switches off the mains power supply to the air conditioner unit if the cabi
net door is opened.
The temperature sensor manager in the rear upper area provides the temperature data inside the cab
inet for remote processing.
19” cabinet, 24HU, front door open

outdoor, front view
door switch air conditioner

Ventilation and
air conditioner SPU, one receiving unit
blank panel
modem and demodulator
8-way RF splitter*
multiport-switch*
UPS, control unit*
UPS, battery pack*
C-bar with terminals
Intrusion sensor, front
bottom cover sheet
* = option
Fig. 1-13 GS outdoor configuration, assembled in a medium 19” cabinet (24HU), example
1.2.4.3 ADS-B Equipment Configuration Example 19” Cabinet 10HU
The ADS-B equipment configuration assembled in a small 19” cabinet (10HU) builds a complete
ADS-B system which comprises one Signal Processing Unit AX 680 SPU. It can be assembled in
addition with an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). The small cabinet is designed for wall mounting.
For easy access to the device connectors at the rear and the cable entries, the front compartment
of the cabinet is hinged. The peripheral equipment used comprises 1 omnidirectional ADS-B RX an
tenna for Mode S, an optional Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) and a GPS antenna.
Ed. 10.13 1-13

19” cabinet, 10HU, assembled 19” cabinet, 10HU, mounted to a wall

front door open front door closed
AX 680 SPU
blank panel
UPS, basic unit*

(incl. battery pack)
Sockets, spare
* = option
Fig. 1-14 ADS-B configuration, assembled in a small 19” cabinet (10HU), example
1-14 Ed. 10.13

1.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

1.3.1 Dimensions and Weights
Ground Station equipment (19” unit)
- AX 680 SPU HxWxD 87 x 482* x 250 [mm] 2HU weight 7.1 kg
Configured system versions (19” units, optional)
Small cabinet option, equipped; HxWxD 600 x 600 x 600 [mm] 10HU weight 90 kg
- AX 680 SPU (1x) HxWxD 87 x 482* x 250 [mm] 2HU weight 7.1 kg
- UPS, RT1000 (1x) HxWxD 87 x 440** x 400 [mm] 2HU weight 17.5 kg
Medium cabinet (optional) with optional 19” rack units
- medium cabinet option HxWxD 1200 x 600 x 600 [mm] 24HU weight 150 kg
(equipped)
- UPS, RT 2000 rack model (1x) HxWxD 87 x 440** x 400 [mm] 2HU weight 6.6 kg
- UPS, RT 2000 battery pack (2x) HxWxD 87 x 440** x 400 [mm] 2HU weight 20.5 kg
- UPS, XS 1000R rack model (1x) HxWxD 87 x 440** x 445 [mm] 2HU weight 16 kg
- UPS, XS 1000R battery pack (2x) HxWxD 87 x 440** x 445 [mm] 2HU weight 23 kg
- Ethernet switch, AT GS-900/16 HxWxD 121 x 184** x 44 [mm] 1HU weight 1 kg

* inclusive angle brackets ** exclusive angle brackets
1.3.2 Peripheral Equipment

ADS-B antenna systems (option)
Omni 115; RX/TX antenna; omnidirectional; high gain
- gain 11.5 dBi
- dimensions, weight Height 2764 mm; ∅ 86 mm; 26 kg
Omni 060; RX/TX antenna; omnidirectional
- gain 6 dBi
- dimensions, weight Height 1640 mm; ∅ 90 mm; 10 kg
Omni 030; RX/TX antenna; omnidirectional; low gain
- gain 3 dBi
- dimensions, weight Height 1750 mm; ∅ 70 mm; 1.5 kg
Hemi 100; RX/TX antenna, hemispherical
- gain 10 dBi
- dimensions, weight (HxWxD) 1305 x 255 x 150 [mm]; 12 kg
Sector 160; RX/TX antenna, sectorial
- gain 16 dBi
- dimensions, weight (HxWxD) 1305 x 255 x 105 [mm]; 12 kg
GPS antenna (option)
- gain 11.5 dBi
- dimensions, weight Height 60 mm; ∅ 100 mm; 0.3 kg
Ed. 10.13 1-15

1.3.3 Power Supply

AX 680 SPU
AC voltage input (AC/DC converter) nom. 115/240 VAC (90 ... 264 VAC), 47/63 Hz,
single phase
AC power consumption 55 W (assembly*: SPB3 board + PTM board)
DC voltage input (DC/DC options) nom. 24 V (18 ... 36 V); option: 48 V (36 ... 75 V)
DC power consumption 60 W (assembly*: SPB3 board + PTM board)
*) different assembly combinations may have different consumption numbers
UPS (option) Xanto XS 1000R with 2 battery packs

AC voltage input (rated) 230 VAC (186 to 288 VAC),
nominal frequency 50 / 60 Hz automatic detection
or configurable as converter
frequency range 40 ... 70 Hz before switching to battery mode
bypass voltage range +10 / -15 % of the nominal voltage (standard)
overvoltage protection MOVs for normal and common overvoltages
max. current input 4.3 A (230 VAC)
AC voltage output 200 V; 208 V; 220 V; 230 V; 240 V (configurable)
voltage range at 100 % load 160 ... 276 VAC
power factor 0.9
batteries (internal or battery pack) internal battery 36 V (3 x 12 V / 7 Ah)
battery module (BP) 36 V (6 x 12 V / 7 Ah)
2 rows parallel
fuse 4x 30 A; 125 VDC
typical battery time in [min] internal battery: 14/6 (50 % / 100 % load)
(bridging time in battery mode) +1 battery pack: 52/22 (50 % / 100 % load)
+2 battery packs: 100/42 (50 % / 100 % load)
UPS (option) Xanto RT 1000 or RT 2000 with 1 / 2 batt. packs

AC voltage input (rated) 230 VAC (186 to 288 VAC), 50 Hz, single phase
max. current input RT 1000: 3.8 A
RT 2000: 7.8 A
AC voltage output 220 VAC; 230/240 VAC (configurable) / 50 Hz
effective power rating RT 1000: 700 W
RT 2000: 1400 W
batteries (internal or battery pack) RT 1000: 3x 12 V; 7.2 Ah
RT 2000: 6x 12 V; 7.2 Ah
typical battery time (battery mode) in [min] standard (intern. batt.): 17/6 (50 % / 100 % load)
typical battery time (battery mode) in [min] 1 battery pack: 18/6 (50 % / 100 % load)
Ethernet switch AT-900/16 (option)

AC voltage input 100 ... 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 A
max. AC power consumption 10 W
1-16 Ed. 10.13

1.3.4 Environmental Conditions

Ambient temperature
operation indoor equipment (SPU, UPS) +10 ... +40 °C
operation outdoor equipment (antennas) -40 ... +70 °C
transport / storage SPU -55 ... +70 °C
transport / storage UPS -25 ... +55 °C
Max. relative humidity
indoor 90 %; non-condensing
outdoor 95 % (-10 ... 39 °C); max. 50 % (-40 ... 70 °C)
non operation and transport up to 100 %; with condensation
Max. wind velocity of optional ADS-B antennas
Omni 030 (3 dBi) 160 km/h
Omni 060 (6 dBi) 180 km/h
Omni 115 (11.5 dBi) 200 km/h
Hemi 100 (10 dBi) 160 km/h
Sector 160 (16 dBi) 160 km/h
1.3.5 Ground Station Data - AX 680 SPU

ADS-B system, basic Ground station built by one SPU, coupled to
ADS-B LAN, UPS option
ADS-B system, option Ground station with redundant equipment, built
by two SPU, coupled to ADS-B LAN, UPS option
Receiving signals 1090 ES ADS-B, GPS L1-band 1575.42 MHz
Coverage range (within a line of sight) up to 250 NM at flight level > 300, omnidirectional
Capacity (GS) > 250 targets
Communication interface UP/IP, SNMP on UDP/IP, SSH, SCP on TCP/IP
Report generation ASTERIX CAT 21 reports (ADS-B),
ASTERIX CAT 23 (status) and Thales Raw Data
TT out Signal Power levels:
SPB3A -39 dBm 2.5 dB
SPB3, EU Version -39 dBm 2.5 dB
SPB3, US Version -43 dBm 2.5 dB
1.3.6 Interfaces
AX 680 SPU
- RF input receive interface (RX signal) SMA, female
- RF input receive interface (GPS signal) SMA, female (with PTM option)
- test transmitter interface (RF signal) SMA, female
- data interface connector: */** network RJ45, 8/8, Ethernet 10/100Base-T (rear, NET1, 2)
auxiliary RJ45, 8/8, Ethernet 10/100Base-T (front, ETH2)
mainten. RJ45, 8/8, Ethernet 10/100Base-T (front, ETH1)
program. serial, V.24, MicroSubD, 9pin, female (front)
- BITE (GS1 - GS2 status exchange) */** RJ12, 6/6
- I/O status interface (e.g. ext. equipment) */** SubD, 15pin, male (three-row)
Ed. 10.13 1-17

- TX control digital (AN1030/1090)*/**not used SubD, 15pin, female (three-row)

- TX control (1090) */** not applicable SubD, 25pin, female (SPU rear)
- TX control (UAT) */** not applicable SubD, 25pin, female (SPU rear)
UPS (optional via SNMP board CS121) */**
data interface connector RJ45, 8/8, Ethernet 10/100Base-T (COM1)
data interface connector (sensors etc.) MiniDIN, 8pin (COM2)
auxiliary signalling contacts RJ11, 6/6 (AUX), 4 configurable Input/Output
* according IEC 60950 ** SELV circuit (Safety Extra Low Voltage)
1.3.7 Conformity and Licensing Approval
The AX 680 SPU used within the herein described ADS-B ground stations is compliant to ICAO An
nex 10 and to current European Regulations for human health (Low Voltage Directive) and electro
magnetic compatibility (EMC). The AX 680 SPU complies with the aeronautical standard DO-260A
§ 2.2.4.4 (Enhanced Squitter Reception Technique).
The AX 680 SPU fulfills the requirements of EC regulation 552/2004 'Declaration of Suitability for Use)
by reference to operational systems': 'FAA-SBS Nation Wide ADS-B' and 'Helsinki MLAT'. These
products meet or exceed the requirements as stipulated in accordance with the regulations and stan
dards. This has been demonstrated by formal testing of which the results are fully documented in in
ternal test documents and protocols.
The product also fulfills the requirements of the following EMC Guidelines:
- Safety; Low Voltage Directive (IEC 950) EN 60950-1:2006 / A11:2009 ; EN 60215
- RoHS Directive 2011/65/EG
- EMC Immunity ETSI EN 301 489-1; EN 61000-6-1;
EN 61000-4-2; EN 61000-4-3; EN 61000-4-4;
EN 61000-4-5; EN 61000-4-6; EN 61000-4-11
- EMC Emissions ETSI EN 301 489-1; EN 61000-3-2; EN 61000-3-3
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EEC and
the EMC Directive 2004/108/EEC and carries the CE mark.
1-18 Ed. 10.13

1.4 GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.4.1 Observation of Safety Regulations
The following general safety precautions are not related to any specific procedures. These are recom
mended precautions that personnel must understand and apply during many phases of operation
and maintenance.
Observe also the safety precautions and measures which are contained in the original technical
manuals (COTS) of the individual equipment manufacturer. In addition to the mentioned instructions
for avoiding damage and injury, always observe national and local pertinent safety regulations.
1.4.2 Safety and Product Warranty

In order to maintain the Thales product warranty and to maintain continued product safety, this prod
uct must not be altered or modified in any way. Changes or modifications to the system hardware or
software, which are not explicitly approved by Thales Customer Service or described in this manual
will void your warranty. Modifications would possibly affect product safety as well.
1.4.3 Work Safety in Outdoor Environment

To avoid risks of lightning, do not work outside a building or on the ground station antenna system
during thunderstorms. No works should also be carried out during wind storms. Work should not be
carried out on or next to the TX antenna system if the antenna is radiating.
1.4.4 Work Safety at Height
Outdoor ground stations must often be installed at elevated site structures like platforms, roofs or tow
ers, etc. Always observe the safety precautions which must be taken by the personnel and in relevant
cases for lifting the equipment hardware with lifting tools in order to avoid personnel injuries or not
to expose persons or equipment around to risk.
Specific guidelines on safe operating procedures for work at height are provided by the Confedera
tion of Aerial Industries Limited [6]. Some of the important safety precautions copied from this guide
line can be found in the safety section of Chapter 3.
1.4.5 Maintenance Operation at the Device

Before removing a subassembly or a plug-in connection, the primary power supply voltage should
always be disconnected by software or by interrupting the mains power supply in order to avoid injury
to persons or subsequent damage to devices or subassemblies.
Maintenance work is only to be performed by skilled and trained technicians.
1.4.6 Handling Electrostatically Sensitive Components

When replacing devices containing electrostatically sensitive components, special precautionary
measures should be taken during removal, transport and installation in order to prevent damage to
the components.
PCB's containing electrostatically sensitive components are marked with this symbol:
Electrostatic damage may be caused when the person performing the subassembly replacement
Ed. 10.13 1-19

bears a static charge due to friction with an insulated floor covering or with synthetic articles of cloth
ing (e.g. soles) and the charge is transferred to the terminals of the MOS components.
In order to avoid this, make positive contact between the system ground and your hand before and
during removal or insertion of the subassembly. Any body charge is then discharged to the system
ground. When the subassembly has been removed, the subassembly should be placed in a special
container or envelope. Use the following procedure and sequence to insert a subassembly:
Removing a device/subassembly in case of repair or maintenance activity
- Switch off the system before beginning the replacement procedure
- Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm
- Remove the subassembly and lay it down on a bench with a grounded conductive worktop
- Pack the subassembly in an antistatic plastic bag and send it off to the manufacturer for repair
Installing a device/subassembly in case of repair or maintenance activity
- Eliminate any static body charges by touching the frame of the grounded system (rack) with both
hands and/or use an earthing cable on the arm
- Remove the subassembly from the antistatic plastic bag. If existent, remove the short-circuit bar
from the subassembly
- Install the subassembly
- Switch the system on again
1.4.7 Safe Usage of Lithium Batteries

State-of-the-art computer systems may contain Lithium batteries for data backup. These are used
in commercial Personal Computers (PC) used for the RCMS/LCMS. If battery replacement is neces
sary, always read the label on the battery. It is recommended to insert only batteries of the same type
according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
! CAUTION
This equipment contains a Lithium battery. Danger of fire and explosion, if not properly
used, handled, or disposed of.
- In case of fire, toxic gases and corrosive liquids may leak out. High fire load!
- Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 60 °C or incinerate any lithium battery.
- Do not short-circuit the lithium battery.
- Do not solder directly on the lithium battery or in its near vicinity.
- When exchanging a lithium battery, only insert a lithium battery of the same type
according to manufacturer's recommendations and observe the correct polarity.
- Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Run-down batteries are objects that can pollute the environment and must be disposed of taking
the proper precautions. Observe national and local regulations.
1-20 Ed. 10.13

1.4.8 Safe Usage of UPS Battery Systems

This manual provides important instructions that you must comply with during the installation and
maintenance of the optional UPS system and the batteries. Read these instructions completely before
you begin working with the UPS battery.
CAUTION
- The UPS system has its own energy supply (batteries). The output of the UPS system can
conduct voltage even when the UPS system is not connected to an AC power source.
- The UPS system conducts life-threatening voltages. All repair and maintenance work
should only be performed by customer service professionals.
- To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock, the UPS system may only be installed in build
ings with controlled temperature and air humidity in which there are no conducting contami
nants present. The ambient temperature may not rise above 40 °C. The UPS system may
not be operated near water or in extremely high humidity (>95 %).
- When installing optional battery modules into a rack, the installation should occur directly
below the UPS system so that all cables between the housings can be run behind the front
cover and not accessible to the user. Depending on the UPS type used, a maximum of four
battery modules per UPS system can be installed.
- Make sure that the UPS system is switched off and disconnected from the power supply
before transporting the UPS system.
- Batteries can pose an electric shock risk or catch fire due to high short-circuit currents.
Please take the necessary measures. The maintenance must be performed by qualified per
sonnel who have been trained in the handling of batteries and who have sound knowledge
about the required safety measures (see Maintenance). Keep unauthorized personnel away
from batteries.
- Batteries may not be incinerated. There is a risk of explosion.
- The batteries must be disposed of properly. Observe the local regulations for proper dis
posal.
1.4.9 Risks of Lightning

To avoid risks of lightning, do not work outside a building or on the Ground Station antenna system
during thunderstorms.
1.4.10 Observation of Safety Regulations

The safety precautions and safety measures have to be regarded which are contained in the original
technical manuals of the individual equipment manufacturer.
In addition to the above mentioned instructions for avoiding and injury, locally valid safety regulations
should always be observed.
Ed. 10.13 1-21

1.4.10.1 Safety Requirements for the Use of Backup Batteries

The ground station outdoor cabinet is designed as a largely air-tight metal enclosure, due to the fact
that it should be well protected against the ingress of dust or dirt and to minimize the energy require
ment for the aircon equipment. However, this design has the downside that it does not allow to dilute
possible hydrogen gas emissions from the gel batteries unless employing special protective equip
ment. The applied protective equipment is described within this manual.
Temperature
sensor
Battery - Battery +
Fig. 1-15 PowerSafe 12V170FS Front Terminal Monobloc Battery (example)

In principle, this fact would form the potential danger of an internal gas explosion. The European stan
dard EN 50 272-2 (Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations - part 2:
Stationary batteries) has been observed with the design process of the Thales battery outdoor cabinet
in order to securely exclude any dangers within this range. The main facts about the battery gas ven
tilation system are described in the following sections.
1.4.11 Battery Gas Ventilation of the Outdoor Cabinet (Option)

General remark about the explanations and instructions in this section: This is a guideline only which
consists of excerpts from national and international standards and guidelines. See EN 50 272-2 and
equivalent national standards (for instance, DIN VDE 0510-1) for further and more detailed informa
tion. Additionally, follow up all safety notes of this product's technical manual.
Ground Station Cabinet
Outdoor version gas ventilation
tube system
tube
system
Batteries
gland
gas exhaust
Fig. 1-16 Battery gas ventilation system, optional outdoor cabinet version (example)
1-22 Ed. 10.13

1.4.11.1 Sources of Battery Gas Emissions

Naturally, the hydrogen production within the battery cells cannot be fully suppressed for electro
chemical reasons. Especially unfavorable operating conditions like high charging voltages and tem
peratures, for instance, can provoke hydrogen production. However, hydrogen is also generated in
small amounts caused by corrosion of the positive plates.
The evolved oxygen produces a defined over-pressure within the cell. This is quite normal. The valve
should not open at too low pressure because in this case too much oxygen would escape and get
irretrievably lost.
When the defined opening pressure is achieved, the valve opens for a short time and releases the
accumulated gas. Under normal operating conditions, this gas consists mainly of hydrogen. Under
unfavorable conditions like high charge voltages at high temperatures, for instance, oxygen would
also escape.
1.4.11.1.1 Ventilation of the Battery Station Cabinet

Battery rooms must be vented according to EN 50 272-2 in order to dilute gas (hydrogen and oxy
gen) evolved with charging and discharging and to avoid explosions in order to secure a proper dilu
tion of explosive gases.
Thus, the electrical installation must not be Ex-protected. The outdoor cabinet is designed to with
stand wet environmental conditions.
1.4.11.1.2 Environment of the Battery Station Cabinet

Spark generating parts must have a safety distance to cell or block openings (respectively valves)
where the diluted gases leave the ground station cabinet as specified in EN 50272-2. The dispersion
of explosive gas depends on the gas release rate and the ventilation close to the source of release.
Heaters with naked flame or glowing parts or devices are forbidden. Heater's temperature must not
exceed 300 °C. Hand lamps are only allowed with switches and protective glass according to protec
tion class II and protection class IP 54.
The required safety distance can also be achieved by the use of a partition wall between battery sta
tion and sparking device.
1.4.12 General Instructions on Package Material Handling and Unpacking

ESD safety while unpacking/packing
Whenever possible, unpack or pack the module boxes, devices or subassemblies only at ESD safe
work stations. Where a safe work station is not guaranteed, it is important for the user to be electrically
discharged before touching the product with his/her hands or tools. This is most easily done by touch
ing a metal part of your grounded system housing.
Keep the original packaging material

Keep all the original packaging material of the module boxes and devices for future storage or war
ranty shipments. If it is necessary to store or ship the device, re-pack it as nearly as possible in the
manner in which it was delivered. In the event that the original packaging material is not available for
storage or warranty shipments, use packaging which complies with the product's technical require
ments (weight, dimensions, etc.) to ensure the proper protection of the product. Special care is ne
cessary when handling or unpacking the module boxes because of their relatively high weight.
Ed. 10.13 1-23

Recycling/disposal of no more used packaging material or product components

This product has been manufactured to satisfy environmental protection requirements where pos
sible. Packaging material or other no more used components must not be disposed somewhere in
the environment but should rather be disposed off at suitable local recycling sites. Many of the com
ponents used (structural parts, printed circuit boards, connectors, batteries, etc.) are capable of be
ing recycled. Final recycling or disposition of this product after its service life must be accomplished
in accordance with applicable country, state, or local laws or regulations.
1.4.13 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Statements

EU-directive 2002/96/EG or WEEE regulates the disposal of waste equipment by users in private
households in the European Union. The according symbol (see Fig. 1-17) on the product or on its
packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed off with your other household waste. In
stead, it is your responsibility to dispose off/recycle your waste equipment by handing it over to a des
ignated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment.
The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to con
serve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the
environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling,
please contact your local city office, your waste disposal service or the dealer where you purchased
the product.
Fig. 1-17 WEEE symbol
1-24 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance Subsystem Description
CHAPTER 2
SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The subsystem description provides information about the individual items of the AX 680 family. It is
not dedicated to a specific configuration but shall highlight the function of the several subsystems
and options available.
2.1 SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT AX 680 (SPU)

2.1.1 Overview
The Signal Processing Unit AX 680 SPU is housed in a 2HU, 19” subrack, which also provides the
power supply (AC or/and DC) and a ventilation/fan unit for the housing. The SPU is based around
a System-Bus (S-Bus). Except the ETH connectors which are on a small board together with the
fan control, the rear mounted connectors are connected to the internal bus board via cables. The SPU
bus board accommodates three double Euroform printed circuit boards (PCB), or two double and
two single Euroform PCBs in the lower section.
All user relevant connectors and indicators are located on the SPU front. The ETH connectors to the
communication network and the power connectors including fuses and filters (AC and DC) and the
mains switch (used with AC supply) are located at the rear of the SPU. The top cover of the housing
is removable to ease the access to the rear connectors. The SubD connectors TX1 and TX2 at the
rear are not used in this configuration.
As the ground station equipment is intended to be installed at remote sites with power and space
constraints, considerable importance was attached to find a solution that combines the best perfor
mance at lowest possible power consumption and size, ready for integration into existing racks.
The AX 680 SPU comprises the following main subassemblies:
- Signal Processing Board (SPB3)
- Power supply, AC/DC and/or DC/DC (optional)
- Fan unit with dust filter
- GPS Position and Timing Module (PTM), optional
SPB3 board DC power supply

slot 1 (option)
air inlet (not assembled)
fan unit blank 18 ... 75 VDC
with dust filter slot 2
PTM board AC power supply
slot 3 100 ... 240 VAC
AX 680, front view, equipped air outlet
Fig. 2-1 SPU housing mechanical design, main subassemblies (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-1

Subsystem Description Description, Operation and Maintenance
As default, it includes one single SPB3 board which integrates a receiver section, a signal processing
section, the processor control section and various interfaces to external. Received RF signals are
converted into video signals by the logarithmic receiver, and analyzed by the signal processing sec
tion in order to reliably detect Mode S signals. The decoded data are collected and further processed
by the SPB board's application software. The information flow as well as the various intermediated
states of processing that a ground station provides and diagnostic interface are shown in Fig. 1-9.
The optional position and timing system (PTM) provides a positive system time reference to support
the SPB's real time clock. It also provides additional information about the GPS status, like position,
dilution of precision, number and identity of satellites visible and – optionally – also GPS integrity infor
mation in the same way as an ADS-B target (RAIM / HPL). The ground station constantly verifies the
GPS health by checking the deviation of the measured GPS position and comparing it with the config
ured ground station's position.
As standard, the SPU is equipped with an AC/DC converter which is to be supplied with nominal 230
VAC (90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz). The power consumption is typ. 100 VA. A DC/DC converter is op
tionally available which is supplied with nominal +24 VDC (18 to 36 VDC) from an external source.
The electronic subassemblies are cooled by a built-in removable fan unit, located at the inner left
side, accessible from the front. Both power supply facilities can be built-in together. With the AC
mains supply, a mains switch at the rear is used to switch off the GS. With the DC supply, switch off
can only be done from the external source.
NOTE: The label containing part and serial numbers of the SPU as well as the label describing
the power consumption is located on the subrack backpanel. Refer to Fig. 2-6.
front view, right side
front view, left side Top cover
Connector panel, rear
Air outlet, power supply

Air Inlet, fan, dust filter
Fig. 2-2 AX 680 SPU, perspective view (examples)

SubD, 25pin
TX 1 / TX 2 NET1, RJ45 NET2, RJ45
DC socket Mains socket
rear panel Flat ribbon Fan control
2x
25pin PCB DC connection AC connection
ETH connection
Bus-Board
top view, without top cover cover
front view, SPB3 and PTM not equipped

Bus-Board
SPB3 / 1 X1
47 1
separator, optional PSU2 DC/DC
SPB3 / 2 opt. X2 with two PCB in the lower section
47 1
fan PTM opt. X3 X4 PSU1 AC/DC

unit
47 1
Fig. 2-3 SPU housing mechanical design, internal connector assignment (example)
2-2 Ed. 10.13

BITE status I/O (digital) BITE Interface (other station)

SubD 15 pin, male RJ12, 6/6
TX control SBC serial port, V.24,

SubD 9 pin, fem. MicroSubD 9 pin, fem.
Auxiliary Ethernet Interface, Test transmission output

RJ45, 8/8 (SMA)
Maintenance Interface,
RJ45, 8/8 RX antenna RF input (SMA)
rear side: * optional

Control Interface TX1 and TX2, not used
Main Ethernet port (rear side), NET1, NET2 RX antenna RF input (SMA)
Fig. 2-4 SPU interfaces, overview, front view (example)
Communication network Spare TX control

AC input Mains switch DC input Main Ethernet port not used
Fuse AC PE Fuse DC
2x T3.2A 2x T10A
Fig. 2-5 SPU 19” subrack, DC/DC and AC/DC option, rear view (example)
Labels: Power consumption, supply Label: SPU part number Label: Chassis P/N
AC DC serial number serial number
Fig. 2-6 SPU location of part/serial numbers, rear view (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-3

2.1.2 Signal Processing Board (SPB3), Overview

The Signal Processing Board is the main unit of the SPU. It comprises both the RF signal receiving
section and the signal processing and control sections. The RF receive section performs to three vari
ants of the SPB3 board (1090 MHz, 1030 MHz, UAT) which are realized by different front-end filters
and FPGA firmware. The RF transmit section is used to generate and inject signals for receiver test.
For ADS-B applications, the receiving section is prepared for using 1090 MHz RF signals.
The front panel of the SPB3 comprises most external interface connectors which may be used during
service. LED indicators inform about the board behavior, e.g. an indicator 'Fail' indicates a malfunc
tion of the RF path (i.e. SPB3 RX section, antenna and cabling) as a result of the BITE tests.
CPU
FPGA
RF transmitter
backend
RF transmitter
frontend
RF in
Activity /
Status LED
Fig. 2-7 SPB3, main electronic features (example)
2.1.2.1 SPB3, Receiver Section

The SPB3 receiver section receives the Mode S downlink RF signals and Mode A/C signals from the
antenna and prepares it as a video input signal for the signal processing section built by the FPGA.
The receiver section down-converts the 1090 MHz antenna signal to an intermediate frequency (IF)
of 86 MHz.
A logarithmic amplifier with a dynamic range of approx. 80 dB compresses this IF signal and demodu
lates it to output a base band signal. The IF signal is split in two paths and fed via transformers to A/D
converters. The max. sensitivity of the receiver unit is approximately –90 dBm.
At the output 'TTout', a modulated RF signal is available to initiate a test transmission into the RX an
tenna via the probe of the antenna for maintenance purposes. An optional Low Noise Amplifier (LNA)
2-4 Ed. 10.13

for the RF signal can be supplied with DC via the antenna cable from the SPB3. It is protected against
short circuit.
The DC supply (+12 V) can be enabled on the SPB3 board (jumper X13) if a LNA is used. If the SPB3
is used without a LNA or other equipment is connected to it, jumper X13 of the SPB3 needs to be
removed.
2.1.2.2 SPB3, Signal Processing Section

The signal processing section (FPGA) processes the video signal of the receiving section. The RX
signal to the processing section is divided in two paths, RX A and RX B. The signal processing section
extracts the Mode S and Mode A/C messages from the video signal and decodes and analyses their
content. At the same time, their power level and precise time of reception/arrival (TOA) is determined.
Results are stored in a dual ported memory and provided to the computing section via the local bus.
RX antenna Network/Bite etc.
Analog receiver section Processing section FPGA Storage oscilloscope

fault recorder
DC supply f. antenna Extern.
RX A Inter-
Filter 86 MHz
TOA unit faces
RX
1090MHz Filter
A Mixer Ring buffer sync. unit Demod.
decoding
IF D noise measurem.
Osc.108 MHz channel message

selection buffer
RX B TOA unit
A Mixer Ring buffer sync. unit Demod.
D noise measurem. decoding
attenuation
Local Bus
Interface
Local oscillator section Osc. to MPC
54 MHz
OCXO VCO/PLL CPU
Clock/TOA/TOT
GPS
ADBC/
control
from PTM module register
Filter 86 MHz ENC/Mod TX state machine

1090MHz Filter I/Q
up converter
IF
data player
TT enable Flash
Analog transmit section TX buffer
MEM
Buffer TX state machine MPC

TX control (digital)
Fig. 2-8 SPB3, simplified block diagram
The Time of Arrival measurement system employs an adaptive thresholding mechanism to read out
a counter, that is driven by an Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) of 54 MHz with high stability.
The TOA measurement accuracy is 7.8 ns RMS. Because of the signal degradation usually encoun
tered in airport environments, the TOA is measured at the first leading edge of the Mode S/A/C pulse
train. An adaptive threshold mechanism makes sure that the TOA is always referred to the same posi
tion on this leading edge.
To detect a valid telegram, the input signal undergoes an elaborated set of tests that evaluate the sig
nal pattern and not individual pulse shape. Adaptive thresholding and test result integration make
sure that the detection is both tolerant and selective. False triggers are reduced through additional
test that evaluate additional parameters like message length, data content, etc.
Ed. 10.13 2-5

As an additional function, the signal processing section is able to generate Mode S uplink and down
link telegrams (including calculation of the address/parity field) and Mode A/C-only all-call tele
grams to drive an additional, external modulator and transmitter unit (TXU). This allows for easy up
grade of a GS-R e.g to a Receive-Calibrate ground station (GS-T(C)) or a Receive-Interrogate
ground station (GS-T(I)) in case of building a multilateration system.
2.1.2.3 SPB3, Computer Section
Control of the SPU, ADS-B process network and communication to the ATC application, the RCMS,
is performed by the computer section of the SPB3. The processor runs an embedded real-time oper
ating system (Linux-based) that has multi-tasking/multi-threading capabilities and offers a Unix-
like application interface.
The SPB3 provides the two main Ethernet interfaces NET1 and NET2 of the ground station. Both con
nectors are located at the rear of the SPU. The main external interface NET1 is used to connect the
ground station via the built-in modem device to the Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS)
via an operational data network.
RX antenna Signal Processing Board Architecture

RF SPB3
signal Ethernet
Complex Baseband FPGA
RF frontend / reception Processor
Signal
RF Filtering Analog-Digital Digital Signal Processing
(1090 ES / UAT / 1030) Conversion (1090 ES / UAT / 1030)
Downconversion Digital TOA / TOT

(1090 ES / UAT / 1030) Osciloscope Clocks and Synchronization Console
GPS-UTC
Interface Test Signal Generation Memory
(1090 ES / UAT / 1030)
RF frontend / reception (test transmitter)

RF
signal Switch Upconversion
Intern / Extern (1090 ES/UAT/1030)
Buffering
(1090 ES/UAT/1030)
Transmitter State
Machine
TX CTL
Buffer
Digital I/F
Fig. 2-9 SPB3, signal processing board architecture
The auxiliary Ethernet interface NET2 serves as auxiliary external interface and may be used e.g. for
communication with external devices such as an Uninterruptible Power Supply. Both interfaces are
separately driven by individual Ethernet controllers.
In addition to that, the SPB3 is equipped with two further Ethernet interfaces (Maint and ETH2). These
connectors are accessible at the front panel of the SPB3 and used to connect to the Local Control
and Monitoring System (LCMS), consisting of a maintenance Laptop PC, using a standard terminal
program (minicom under Linux). The connector ETH2 is auxiliary.
2-6 Ed. 10.13

Also for programming purposes, a V.24 serial port is available at the front panel. This port allows to
open a local command shell and to perform initial configuration for the ground station. If the Laptop
does not include a serial connector but an USB port, a special conversion cable (USB to serial) has
to be used which is optionally available.
Periodically, the computer section polls the dual-ported RAM on the VME-bus. If data are available,
they are read completely. The first five bits of the telegram data block (downlink format number) are
then evaluated and all telegrams formats not selected for further processing are discarded in order
not to overload the system with unwanted signals (format filtering). Next, the confidence bits are eval
uated in order to start the error handling process.
If the residuum of the parity calculation is zero, the telegram was a correctly received squitter (or an
all-call reply without any interrogator identifier – there is no way to distinguish this specific case from
a squitter). If the last nibble of the residuum is not zero, this nibble is supposed to be an interrogator
identifier of adjacent radar and the telegram is assumed to be an all-call reply. A configurable filter
allows selecting how many bad confidence bits can be tolerated before a telegram is discarded. This
elaborated mechanism guarantees a false telegram rejection rate of more than 99.9 %.
The decoded telegrams are then put into the network transmission buffer and forwarded to the RCMS
via the UDP/IP stack. The network overhead is minimised by transferring as many data sets simulta
neously in one UDP packet. All configurable ground station parameters are set and can be read by
SNMP and are stored on the central station's hard disk and in a non-volatile memory area in the
ground station's SPB. For integrity reasons, the computer section monitors the execution of its
threads and also the correct reception of the BITE signal. The detailed status information is available
via SNMP.
In addition to that, a hardware watchdog timer is reset if BITE tests have been successful. If the timer
is not reset in time, an error LED will be activated and the BITE status output interface of the SPB will
generate a hardware signal.
The SPB computer section retrieves its operating system and application software from an integrated
Flash-EPROM. The boot process is usually executed from that memory. After power up, the ground
station will thus start up automatically within a boot time of 1 min.
During runtime, a terminal attached to its V.24/RS 232 serial port can be used to call an embedded
runtime shell. Further commands to perform manual tests, to reboot and reconfigure the ground sta
tion are available at this stage.
Ed. 10.13 2-7

2.1.2.4 SPB3, Definition of Front Panel Connectors J1 to J8

The following defines the assignment of connectors at the front panel of the SPB3.
- J1, RF In (RF interface receive); used for RX antenna; connector SMA.

This connector achieves also to supply an optional Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) with +12 V which
is connected to the antenna. The DC supply is enabled with jumper X13 on the SPB3 board. As
default, it is disabled. A LED indicates the availability of the DC supply.
- J2, TTout (RF interface transmit); used to inject a test message in the antenna; connector SMA.
This connector is used if a test transmission shall be used for testing the receiving part of the SPB3.
It is injected in the receive antenna via the antenna probe.
- J3, CONSOLE (programming interface); connector MicroSubD, 9pin, female

The programming interface is used to connect a terminal console, e.g. Laptop PC. It achieves the
task to program and configure the SPU. A crossed serial cable (null modem) is to be used.
Assignment of J3:
PIN ASSIGNMENT PIN ASSIGNMENT
1 n.c. 6 n.c.
2 RxD Receive data 7 RTS Ready to send
3 TxD Transmit data 8 CTS Clear to send
4 n.c. 9 n.c.
5 Ground
- J4, BITE I/O (status exchange); optional use; connector RJ12, 6pin
The status exchange can be used to interchange the BITE status between two ground stations (GS
A with GS B) at a dual site if the corresponding BITE test is enabled. BSTAT_out shows the actual
status of the built in test equipment, BSTAT_in allows to read the status of another ground station
by the application software.
Assignment of J4:
1 n.c. 4 BSTAT_in-
2 Ground 5 BSTAT_out+
3 BSTAT_in+ 6 BSTAT_out-
Programming Test Transmission RFsignal, RF in

front view CONSOLE TT out
BITE
J4 J3 J2 J1
Fig. 2-10 Signal Processing Board (SPB3), external interface connectors (1) (example)
2-8 Ed. 10.13

- J5, I/O (Input/Output interface); connector SubD, 15pin, male

This interface provides 8 input lines and 4 transfer lines: The status signals are general purpose
input lines. Their digital status can be read via the SPB_sense register.
The status lines 0 to 7 are readable by software. The status lines are internally equipped with a
pull-up resistor to safely presume a logical '1' status if not connected.
The transfer lines 0 to 4 are configured by software. The transfer lines are passive connections be
tween the front panel and the internal SPB3 connector at the bus board. They are used to forward
backplane signals to the front panel or vice versa. They are protected by a serial 100 ohm resistor.
The max. permitted current load is 50 mA.
Assignment of J5:
1 Ground 9 Status 3 Input
2 Transfer 0 Output 10 Status 4 Input
6 Status 0 Input 14 n.c.
7 Status 1 Input 15 n.c.
8 Status 2 Input
- J6, Transmitter Interface (TX); used for TXU; connector SubD, 15pin, female
This transmitter interface is used to drive external RF equipment like modulators and/or transmit
ting stages. The transmitter interface will send the data to be transmitted, control the amplitude
and timing of transmissions and receive status information from the transmitter. The signals of this
interface are available at the rear side connectors (not used), and a subset of them at the front panel
connector. For transmitting Mode−S and Mode A/C messages on air, an uplink/downlink modula
tor and transmitter unit at 1090 MHz is required.
The interface is designed to drive the Thales 1030/1090 Transmitter (TXU). It is used for downlink
as well as for uplink telegrams. The SPB provides digital video signals. All signals have TTL level
characteristics (with 50 ohm termination) and are equipped by AC filter to ensure high signal shape
quality. The signal is available 120 µs for downlink telegrams before the video signal carries the
signal shape. In ADS-B only applications, this interface is not used.
Assignment of J6:
1 Ground 9 TX_Att(4) Interrog. power level
2 TX_Pulse Mode S/AC video sign. 10 TX_Att(5) Interrog. power level
3 TX_Phase Inter. phase rev. signal 11 Latch_Att Power level data ready stable state
4 TX_enable Transm. enable 12 UL/DL Up/downlink transmission type
5 TX_Att(0) Interrog. power level 13 TOT_Trigger Time of Transmission
6 TX_Att(1) Interrog. power level 14 TX_Status(0) Equipment status 1
7 TX_Att(2) Interrog. power level 15 TX_Status(1) Equipment status 2
8 TX_Att(3) Interrog. power level
TX Control Status ext. device
front view TX I/O
J6 J5
Ed. 10.13 2-9

- J7, ETH2 (Ethernet interface); optional use; connector RJ45, 8pin

Auxiliary interface, used to connect further devices for communication e.g. UPS SNMP.
Assignment of J7:
1 ETH_F_1_TXP Transmit+ 5 n.c.
2 ETH_F_1_TXM Transmit+ 6 ETH_F_1_RXM Receive+
3 ETH_F_1_RXP Receive+ 7 n.c.
4 n.c. 8 n.c.
- J8, MAINT (Ethernet interface); maintenance use; connector RJ45, 8pin
This interface is used to connect an LCMS (Laptop PC) for maintenance purposes.
Assignment of J8:
1 ETH_F_0_TXP Transmit+ 5 n.c.
2 ETH_F_0_TXM Transmit+ 6 ETH_F_0_RXM Receive+
3 ETH_F_0_RXP Receive+ 7 n.c.
4 n.c. 8 n.c.
Ethernet interface TX control
MAINT ETH2 TX
J8 J7 J6
2.1.2.5 SPB3, Definition of Front Panel Indicators and Controls

The following table gives a definition of the indicators and controls of the SPB3.
Board Indicator Color Control Function of control or indicator (lit or flashing)
SPB3 RST (Reset) Recessed key, manual reset of SPB3.
LED, Fail red Indicates that the board is not operational or

(bicolor) BITE has detected an error
green Board is operational; no BITE error detected
LED, RX green Flashing: indicates reception of a telegram
LED, TX green Flashing: indicates transmit activity
LED, TT green Normally off, indicates transmission of a test

transmission downlink message.
LED, DC green Lit: DC supply for RX LNA is enabled.
front view RX (reception of telegram) FAIL (BITE indication watchdog fails)
TT (Test Transmission)
Board Reset TX (Transmit activity) DC (DC to RX LNA enabled)
Fig. 2-13 Signal Processing Board (SPB3), indicators and controls (example)
2-10 Ed. 10.13

2.1.2.6 SPB3, Variants of Front Plate
The following Figs. 2-14 to 2-15 provide an overview of further SPB3 variants. The SPB3 may come
with slightly different kinds of front plates, however, the principal functionalities of the various interfa
ces, indicators or controls are identical to the referenced elements described in this section.
RX (reception of telegram)
FAIL (BITE indication watchdog fails)
Ethernet interface Status ext. device CONSOLE
front view MAINT ETH2 I/O TT out
J8 J7 TT (Test Transmission)
Board Reset TX (Transmit activity) DC (DC to RX LNA enab
Fig. 2-14 Variant of Signal Processing Board SPB3 (example)
TX (Transmit activity)
TT (Test Transmission)
Ethernet interface TT out
front view MAINT ETH2 CONSOLE I/O DC (DC to RX LNA enabled)
J8 J7 Board Reset RF in
RX (reception of telegram)
FAIL (BITE indication watchdog fails)
Fig. 2-15 Signal Processing Board SPB3A (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-11

2.1.3 Position and Time Module 1 (PTM1), Option

The Position and Time Module 1 (PTM 1) processes signals from the Global Positioning System (GPS)
and the geostationary satellites from satellite-based augmentation systems (SBAS). It uses up to 14
discrete parallel channels for Coarse/Acquisition (C/A) code-phase (pseudo range) measurements
and carrier-phase measurements on the GPS L1 band (1575.42 MHz). In addition to providing the
absolute timing reference for the internal timing system (GTS), the receiver also makes available the
measured position of its GPS antenna as well as other data like various dilutions of precision (DOP)
and the satellites actually being tracked by the unit.
The PTM1 board is comprised of two receiver modules which are supplied from one GPS antenna
via the integrated RF power splitter. One module can be dedicated to position evaluation and the other
module to highly precise time evaluation, or one for both GPS time and position information. The re
ceiver's use of autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM) functionality allows to determine the horizon
tal level of protection (HPL) in the same way as an ADS-B equipped aircraft. HPL indicates the ability
to determine satellite errors within the current constellation. It is used to provide position and time as
a basis for the timing system. The PTM1 board interfaces via the bus board backpanel with the SPB3.
The GPS signal is received through an L-band antenna and a low noise amplifier integrated in the
antenna. The PTM1 board's RF input port also supplies DC to the antenna. The DC supply voltage
is selectable at the board with jumper J10, which is set to 5 VDC.
Bus board
PTM TIME/Position
Receiver 1 det. signal
RF input Evaluation Interface
and to Bus board SPB3
GPS Signal in RF power splitter Mode pre-processing Pos./Time
Time/Position select signal
+DC out Receiver 2
GPS antenna DC supply f. antenna DC 3.3V DC/DC conv.
det. signal DC
Fig. 2-16 Position and Time Module 1 (PTM1), simplified block diagram
RF power splitter
RF input
GPS time receiver
GPS position receiver
Status indicators
Fig. 2-17 PTM1 board, main components
2-12 Ed. 10.13

RF in from antenna,
DC out to antenna
Data Status
Position evaluation failed Time evaluation failed BITE flow antenna DC to antenna on
Fig. 2-18 Position and Time Module 1 (PTM1), front view
The following table gives a definition of the indicators of the PTM1 module.
Board Indicator Color Control Behavior (lit or flashing)
PTM LED, Position Fail red Normally off; lit if position function faulty.
This LED is controlled by the SPB3.
LED, Time Fail red Normally off; lit if time function faulty.
This LED is controlled by the SPB3.
LED, BITE red On, if internal fault or satellites not locked.

LED, 1PPS green Flashing once a sec., indicates a PPS trigger.
LED, Antenna red On, if antenna not connected or failed.

(bicolor) green On, if antenna is connected and current to
GPS antenna LNA within limits.
LED, LNA DC green On, if DC supplied to antenna.
2.1.4 Position and Time Module 2 (PTM2), Option

The Position and Time Module Mark I (PTM1) provides a very similar range of features like the PTM1
board, see section 2.1.3. However, the PTM2 board has only one GPS receiver module instead of two.
ATTENTION
Danger of Equipment Damage. The opt. PTM2 board is not hot-pluggable. The PTM2
board will be damaged if the contact pins on the board's bottom side are short-circuited
while being voltage-supplied. To prevent damage, ensure that power is removed from
the AX 680 SPU unit before pulling out the PTM2 board from the SPU subrack or while
plugging in. There is a gasket cord round the SPU subrack's slot which is made of electri
cally conducting material which may cause shorts while board inserting or plugging in.
AX 680 SPU PTM2 board

front view
PTM2 board, top view
Fig. 2-19 Position and Time Module (PTM2), top view and front view (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-13

2.1.5 Power Supply
DC/DC converter (option) AC/DC converter
Indicators: Fault, Power on Indicators: Fault, Power on
Fig. 2-20 SPU power supply options: DC/DC converter and AC/DC converter (standard)
The power supply of the SPU can be performed with a wide range AC supply of nominal 115/240 VAC
(90 to 264 VAC) from mains or, as an option, with a DC supply of nom. +24 V (18 to 36 VDC). There
is also a second DC supply option of nom. +48 V (36 to 75 VDC). The associated DC or AC connec
tors are located at the rear of the SPU. Each converter option comprises four high current outputs.
The connector assembly contains the appropriate input filter and fuses (see Fig. 2-5). The SPU
equipped with the AC converter is switched on or off with the AC switch (I/0) at the rear of the SPU,
while the optional DC supply has to be switched on or off at the external DC source. Both power sup
plies can be used together.
The following table gives a definition of the indicators and controls of the power supply modules.
Board Indicator Color Control Behavior (lit or flashing)

AC/DC or LED, Fault red Normally off; if lit, converter is faulty, or not
DC/DC supplied by external power source.
LED Power green Normally on, DC input voltage available.
Power connector assembly (see Fig. 2-5):

Item Mains Switch Switches AC/DC converter to mains (I/0)
Fuses AC 2x T3.2A, 250 V, protects AC input supply line.
DC (24 V option) 2x T10A, 250 V, protects DC input supply line.
DC (48 V option) 2x T12.5A, 250 V, prot. DC input supply line.
The converter options/devices deliver the following supply voltages/currents:
- AC/DC converter (standard)

input nom. 115/240 V (90 to 264 V AC); 47 to 63 Hz
output +5 V/40 A, +3.3 V/ 40 A, +12 V/5.5 A, -12 V/2 A; 250 W max.
- DC/DC converter 24 V (option)

input nom. 24 V (18 to 36 V DC; 7.0 A)
output +5 V/25 A, +3.3 V/ 36 A, +12 V/3 A, -12 V/0.5 A
- DC/DC converter 48 V (option)

input nom. 48 V (36 to 75 V DC; 8.7 A)
output +5 V/40 A, +3.3 V/ 40 A, +12 V/5.5 A, -12 V/2 A; 250 W max.
2-14 Ed. 10.13

2.1.6 Fan Unit
The fan unit is used to cool the internal subassemblies of the SPU. It is extractable for easy exchange.
The front panel contains LEDs (FAN FAIL and GS FAIL) which indicate a fault of the fan or of the GS.
A dust filter mat protects against intrusion of dust particles.
front view rear view
Fault
Indicators
Filter mat frame

extractor handle
Dust filter mat
Fan (80 mm, 2x) Connector DC
Fig. 2-21 Fan unit tray
Ed. 10.13 2-15

2-16 Ed. 10.13

2.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT OF THE ADS-B AX 680 FAMILY

2.2.1 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto XS 1000R (Option)
The AX 680 ground station family can be equipped with additional rack-mounted Uninterruptible
Power Supply (UPS) modules, type Online USV Xanto XS 1000R with additional battery packs. Some
times, only the product designation S1000R is used, as the X stands for the product series Xanto. The
R stands for 'Rack' version.
The UPS is used to supply the Ground Station in case of a mains power supply failure. The additional
SNMP support card DW5SNMP30 is optionally available so that UPS parameters like battery loading
status, timeout configuration, voltages, alarms, etc. are available via SNMP.
UPS system XS 1000R Slot for optional Remote emergency

SNMP interface card power-off (REPO)
Mains out sockets RS 232 USB Relais output Mains in socket

contact
Fig. 2-22 XS 1000R base control unit, rear view (example)
Fuses behind
this plate
Fuses behind
this plate
Fig. 2-23 XS 1000R, base control unit and battery packs, rear view (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-17

2.2.2 XS 1000R (Option), Design Features

The UPS backup battery system XANTO XS 1000R protects against the most frequent types of supply
problems such as power failure, voltage dips, over and under voltage, voltage surges, interference,
switching and voltage spikes, frequency fluctuations and harmonic distortion. The mains power sup
ply often fails and the quality of the power supply can often be subject to significant fluctuations.
With the XS 1000R, the ADS-B ground station is securely protected against power supply problems
and the functionality of the hardware is maintained. The XS 1000R's key features are:
S True double conversion technology (VFI-SS-111) with high power density, generator compatibil
ity and independence from the line frequency
S Perfect sinusoidal output voltage
S Converter mode
S Two configurable load segments
S Automatic bypass for overload, e.g. during switching to larger loads
S Scalable power failure bridging time with additional battery modules
S Intelligent battery management (IBM+), for optimized charging and maximum power failure bridg
ing time
S Hot-swap battery with up to 94 % efficiency thanks to High-Efficiency (HE) mode
S RS232 and USB interfaces, relay output contactors
S Slot for optional SNMP adapter
S Emergency-off function (Remote Emergency Power-Off; REPO)
On/Off button Operating Panel

with display
Air Inlet
Control unit
19” mounting angle
Battery pack
(BP)
internal battery
(shielding cover is
mounted)
Cable for
module connection
Fig. 2-24 XS 1000R front view. Bottom picture: front cover removed (examples)
2-18 Ed. 10.13

2.2.2.1 XS 1000R Operating Display Description
Fig. 2-25 UPS XS 1000R display description (example)
For more details about display messages, please refer to the COTS manual of the XS 1000R [1].
2.2.2.2 Communication Options

The XS 1000R features a serial (RS232) and a USB communications port as well as a slot for optional
interface cards. You can configure relays, signal inputs and baud rates of the serial interfaces using
the menu on the control panel (see 'User Settings table' in the COTS manual [1]) The data transfer
rate of the USB interface is set to 2400 baud.
2.2.2.3 USB Communication Interfaces (Option)

To facilitate communication between the UPS system and a computer, connect the computer using
a suitable USB data cable (included in the scope of supply) to one of the USB communication ports
of the UPS system. Fig. 2-26 shows the position of the USB communication ports.
Ed. 10.13 2-19

Ethernet interface
Temperature sensor interface
Door intrusion sensor interface
Fig. 2-26 USB communication interfaces (option) of UPS system Xanto XS 1000R (example)
2.2.2.4 RS232 Communication Interface (Option)

When the RS232 connection cable is connected, the data exchange data between the UPS system
and the central ADS-B ground station control via RCMS is made possible.
The assignment of the cable connection pins for the RS232 communications port the functions of the
connection pins is shown in Fig. 2-27 below.
1) Configurable; see setting for ”Relay configuration” in User settings.

2) If connection pin 3 receives the ”Low” (+V) signal for at least 5 seconds, the UPS system executes the command selected
in the ”Signal Inputs” setting (see User settings in the COTS manual [1]).
3) If the selected state is enabled, the output signals on connection pin 1 and 8 switch from ”Low” (positive voltage” to ”High”
(negative voltage). If the state is no longer given, the output signal switches again to ”Low”.
Fig. 2-27 RS232 communication port (DB-9 connector) and its pin assignment
2.2.2.5 Slot for Interface Cards

The XANTO XS 1000R is equipped with a slot (see Fig. 2-22) for the interface card 'DW5SNMP30
SNMP Adapter Professional' or other card options. The SNMP adapter communicates via TCP/IP with
the connected consumers in the network; additional interface for temperature sensor and building
management.
2-20 Ed. 10.13

2.2.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto RT1000/RT2000 (Option)

The AX 680 ground station family can be equipped with an additional rack-mounted Uninterruptible
Power Supply module (UPS, type Xanto RT1000 with internal battery pack or Xanto RT2000 with exter
nal battery packs), dedicated to an SPU. This is provided in ground station systems built in a 19” cabi
net 10HU with one UPS base control unit, or built in a 19” cabinet 24HU with two independent UPS
base control units with battery pack, dedicated to one SPU each, if two AX 680 are built in.
The UPS is used to supply the individual Ground Station in case of a power supply failure. An addi
tional SNMP support card (DW5SNMP30) is available so that UPS parameters like battery loading
status, timeout configuration, voltages, alarms, etc. are available via SNMP. It is connected to the cor
respondent input (e.g. ETH2) of the AX 680 SPU in order to provide network connectivity.
Air Inlet On and OFF button Operating Panel with LED

Control Unit
UPS RT1000
UPS RT2000
19” mounting angle
Battery Pack
UPS RT2000 only
front view
COM2, optional use for temp. sensor device

Air outlet, fan Breaker (250V/12A)
AUX, optional in/output facilities
UPS RT1000
additional SNMP board

and network connector rear view
Control unit RT1000 incl. battery Mains out Mains in
COM2, optional use for temp. sensor device

AUX, optional in/output facilities Breaker (250V/12A)
UPS RT2000
additional SNMP board

and network connector rear view
Control unit RT2000 Air outlet, Mains out Interconnection Mains in
fans to battery pack
rear view
Battery Pack
(for RT2000)
Battery Pack 6x12V / 7.2AH Interconnection to control unit, Input/Output
Fig. 2-28 Uninterruptible Power Supply, base control unit and battery pack (with RT2000 only)
(example)
Ed. 10.13 2-21

2.2.3.1 Controls and Indicators Control Unit and Pin Assignment SNMP Board
The following tables give a definition of the indicators and controls of the UPS control panel.
Indicator Color Control Behavior (lit or flashing)

ON The button ON / Alarm-OFF can perform three functions:
1. Switch on UPS/inverter: Press and hold down the
button ON until you hear an audible signal (approx.
1...2 s). The UPS will switch to normal mode.
2. Alarm ON/OFF (in battery mode): An audible signal is
emitted every 3 s in battery mode. Press and hold down
the button ON until you hear an audible signal (approx.
1...2 s). This will deactivate the intermittent signal.
To reactivate it, press and hold down the ON button
again until you hear an audible signal (approx. 1...2 s).
3. Activate battery test function (in normal mode):
Press and hold down the button ON until you hear an
audible signal (approx. 1...2 s)
OFF The button OFF performs two functions:
1. Switch off inverter: To switch off the inverter in normal or
battery mode, press and hold down the button OFF (for
approx. 2 s). The output sockets are no longer live.
2. Standby mode: In bypass mode, press and hold down
the button OFF (for approx. 1...2 s). The UPS will dis
connect the voltage from the output.
LED, Battery green UPS operation / battery operation and battery voltage
within tolerances (continuously lit).
Flashing LED: battery faulty or charging voltage too high.
LED, Inverter green Normal operation / inverter operation (continuous light).
Flashing LED: inverter faulty.
LED, Bypass green Bypass mode: the Bypass mode protects the internal elec
tronics. The UPS switches to this mode in the event of an
inverter fault. The load is supplied with power directly by
the input voltage, i.e. no battery backup.
LED, Line green Mains voltage within tolerances. In the event of a power
failure, this LED will go off.
LED, Alarm red Fault, e.g. overload.
Operating panel, control unit Connectors COM2, AUX on SNMP board
Inverter LED Bypass LED
Battery LED Line LED
On button Alarm LED ETH COM2 AUX
123456
876
5 4 3
21
Error UPS status ok

(red, lit if fault or system boot) (green, flashs if ok)
Pin (COM2, Mini-DIN) Pin (AUX, RJ11)
1 DCD 1 +3.3V
2 RxD 2 In/Out1
3 TxD 3 In/Out2
4 DTR 4 In/Out3
5 DSR 5 In/Out4
6 RTS 6 GND
OFF button LED 5 4 3 21 Load and battery 7 CTS
capacity LEDs 8 RI (example)
Fig. 2-29 UPS control unit operating panel, indicators and pin assignment of SNMP board
2-22 Ed. 10.13

Indicator Color Behavior (lit or flashing)

Capacity LEDs green These LEDs signal the UPS system load if the mains power is avail
1...5 able (normal operation) or remaining capacity if battery operation is
activated in case of a mains failure.
In the case of mains operation, the LEDs indicate the capacity of the
batteries while charging:
1st LED 0 ... 25 % on (all other off) ↓ charge
2nd LED 26 ... 50 % on ↓
3rd LED 51 ... 75 % on ↓
4th LED 76 ... 100 % on ↓
5th LED 101 ... 105 % on (all on) fully charged
>105 % all on fully charged
In the case of battery operation, the LEDs indicate the capacity of
the batteries while discharging:
1st LED >96 % on (all on) ↓ full capacity
2nd LED 76 ... 100 % on ↓ discharge
3rd LED 51 ... 75 % on ↓
4th LED 26 ... 50 % on ↓
5th LED 0 ... 25 % on (all other off) low capacity
Specific LED and audible signal combinations indicate certain statuses, as shown below:
Ed. 10.13 2-23

Specific LED and audible signal combinations indicate certain statuses, as shown below:
The optional Temperature Sensor Manager ('SM_T_COM', see Fig. 2-30) is used to measure the
temperature inside the 19” indoor or outdoor cabinet with an RS232 protocol. The measured tempera
ture is applied via SNMP to connector 'COM2' of the additional SNMP board on the rear of the UPS
base control unit. The SM_T_COM shows the actual values on the CS121 Webserver screen and al
lows to trigger alarms, E-Mails, messages in case the values exceed configurable thresholds.
Connectors COM2, AUX on SNMP board PIN assignment Temp Sensor Manager (SM_T_COM)
Pin (COM2, Mini-DIN) Pin (AUX, RJ11) cabinet rear, top or mid
1 DCD 1 +3.3V
ETH COM2 AUX 2 RxD 2 In/Out1
123456 3 TxD 3 In/Out2
876
5 4 3 4 DTR 4 In/Out3
21 5 DSR 5 In/Out4
6 RTS 6 GND
7 CTS
8 RI
Error(Link UPS status ok

(red, lit if fault or system boot) (green, flashs if ok)
Fig. 2-30 Indicators and pin assignment of SNMP board, view of Temp Sensor Manager
2.2.4 Rack Integration

Ground stations follow the 19” form factor for easy installation into existing racks. The RF cables con
necting the site equipment to the antennas are usually placed at the rear of a 19” rack. The RF input
connectors (SMA) of the ground station AX 680 are located on its front panels. To relieve the more
delicate SMA connectors of the ground station front from mechanical stress imposed by stiff RF
cables, an exchange panel shall be used together with the appropriate cables. To built up a ground
station, various 19” cabinets are available as option. The offered cabinets provide the necessary ac
cessories to assemble the ADS-B equipment to it.
rear of a 19” rack
VHF RX antenna GPS antenna 2

RF in
Spare GPS antenna 1
Fig. 2-31 Exchange Panel 4/2, 2HU, optional (example)
2-24 Ed. 10.13

2.2.4.1 19” Cabinet Options 24HU and 10HU

Three options of 19” cabinets are available to configure and assemble the components of a AX 680
ground station. The cabinets are pre-assembled and comprises a.o. guide rails, power supply
cables, sockets, ventilation, temperature and intrusion sensors. The front doors are lockable by key.
Standard cabinet, medium Standard cabinet small

19” 24HU (floor mount), closed 19” cabinet, 24HU, front door open 19” 10HU (wall mount)
Low cost cabinet, medium

19” 24HU (floor mount)
Fig. 2-32 Available 19” cabinet options (examples)
The wall mounted small cabinet is designed for one AX 680 SPU and one optional UPS, while the
medium 24HU cabinets are designed to house up to 4 AX 680 SPU and up to two UPS units with exter
nal battery pack or up to four UPS units with internal battery. To achieve an easy access to the connec
tors at the rear of the devices and the cable entries, the front compartment of the small 10HU cabinet
is hinged. The wall-mounted part includes a C-bar with terminals for e.g. mains and an angeled
exchange panel to interconnect the antenna cables. Optionally, the cabinet can be equipped with a
cooling fan and a heating device, both controlled by temperature sensors.
Ed. 10.13 2-25

wall mounted part with cable entries equipment compartment front door (lockable)
c-bar with terminals

(e.g. mains) devices rear
cable entry top
mounting Exchange panel

rails
cable entry, bottom ventilation opening
wall
Fig. 2-33 Design of 19” cabinet, 10HU (example)
The medium std. 19” cabinet provides an exchange panel mounted to the upper rear part and a lock
able rear door below it. As an option, an outdoor cabinet version with air conditioning is available.
Figure 2-34 shows the 24HU standard cabinet's exchange panel elements. It enables an easy ac
cess to the necessary connectors for RF, LAN or power supply connections without the necessity to
open the door. The standard is assembled with one connector each for the 1 RX antenna, 1 GPS an
tenna and 1 Ethernet connection. The spare connector holes are opened punching the cover plates.
VHF Test Transmission out (1...4), spare Ethernet1 Ethernet2 Mains OUT Mains out Fuse (5AT)
LAN LAN
GPS antenna 1
GPS antenna 2
spare
VHF RX in (1)
Communications Mains in Mains IN Earthing bolt
VHF RX in (2..4), spare
spare Fuse switch (2x10A)
Fig. 2-34 Exchange Panel elements, 24HU standard cabinet, rear (example)
2-26 Ed. 10.13

2.2.5 AT-GS900/16 Unmanaged Gigabit Ethernet Switch (Option)

Product designation AT-GS900/16 Unmanaged Gigabit Ethernet Switch
Model AT-GS900/16 - 16 port 10/100/1000T unmanaged switch
Short name Ethernet switch
Manufacturer Allied Telesis Inc. (USA)
Configuration delivered with country-specific power cord
COTS documentation AT-GS900/16 Installation guide [3]
2.2.6 Description
Each ADS-B Ground Station is connected to the IP-based network via the Ethernet switch.
Equipped with an internal power supply and built with a robust metal chassis, the AT-GS900/16
switch fits well for the ADS-B ground station.
Fully auto-configuring, this switch requires minimal set-up. Auto-sensing ports connect existing
10 Mbps, 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps Ethernet UTP devices and all units can be installed in minutes. Auto
MDI/MDIX on all ports enable simple connection to other hubs and switches. Easy-to-read front
panel LEDs show ongoing switch status and simplify troubleshooting.
Key Features
S Power saving port features on each port incl. cable length detection and power minimization
S Link-down power savings
S Lower power on short cable runs
S Support for jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes
S Wirespeed performance
S Non-blocking architecture
S Auto-negotiation Gigabit ports
S Auto MDI/MDI-X on TX ports
S Full-duplex flow control
S Silent operation, fanless
front view
Eco-friendly System/ 10/100/1000 ports (1...16)

switch Port LEDs Base Twisted Pair Ports
Abbreviations: L/A: Link/Activity D/C: Drop/Collision ACT: Activity FDX: Full-Duplex HDX: Half-Duplex
Fig. 2-35 AT-GS900/16 Unmanaged Gigabit Ethernet Switch, front view, option
Ed. 10.13 2-27

2.2.6.1 LEDs
The system and port LEDs on the front panel of the AT-GS900/16 switches display the switch and
its port status information, see Fig. 2-36. Each port has two LEDs.
Abbreviations: L/A: Link Activity D/C: Drop/Collision
Fig. 2-36 System and port LEDs on the front panel of the optional AT-GS900/16
System and port LEDs on the front panel of the optional switch AT-GS900/16
Indicator State Behavior

Power Green The switch is powered ON and operating normally.
OFF The switch has no power.
L/A Green The switch is powered ON and operating normally.
OFF The switch has no power.
Lit Green A valid 1000 Mbps link is established on the port.
Lit Orange A valid 10 or 100 Mbps link is established on the port.
Blinking Green A 1000 Mbps packet transmission and reception is in process

on the port.
Blinking Orange A 10/100 Mbps packet transmission and reception is in pro

cess on the port.
OFF No link is established on the port.
D/C Lit Green A full-duplex link is established on the port.
Blinking Green The port is experiencing a collision in half duplex mode.
OFF A half-duplex link is established on the port.
2-28 Ed. 10.13

2.2.6.2 Eco-Friendly Switch
The eco-friendly switch on the front panel is multi-functional and shown in Fig. 2-35. It may be used
to enable all the port LEDs (out position) or conserve power by turning off the port LEDs (in position).
The switch functions are described in the table below.
Fig. 2-37 eco-friendly switch
Indicator Action Results

eco-friendly OFF (out position) All front panel LEDs are enabled.
switch
ON (In position) All front panel LEDs are disabled for power conservation with
the exception of POWER LED, which remains active at all times.
2.2.6.3 Green Power Saving Ports

All Ethernet ports support the power saving functions including Link-Down and Cable Length power
savings. The greatest power savings occur when all 8 ports linked status is down and the ports are
inactive. The switch uses the most power when all 8 ports are linked up to via Ethernet cables that
are the maximum length or 100 meters.
When a link is not established on an individual port, the switch controller automatically reduces the
power supplied to the port's circuitry to an idle level. The greater the number of ports that are not
linked up results in a greater cumulative power savings for the switch.
When a link is established on an individual port, the power provided to the PHY circuitry is based on
the length of the Ethernet cable that you connect to the port. Full power is provided to the port's cir
cuitry if the cable length is detected to be the maximum specified cable length or 100 m. If the cable
length is shorter than this, the switch senses the cable length and reduces the available port power
in proportion to the detected cable length. This feature provides power efficiencies for the port even
when it is actively linked to another network device.
2.2.6.4 AC Power Connector

The AT-GS900/16 switch has a single AC power supply socket on the back panel. To power ON or
OFF the switch, you connect or disconnect the power cord.
AC power connector
Fig. 2-38 AC power supply socket, rear view
Ed. 10.13 2-29

2.2.6.5 RJ45 Twisted Pair Port Connectors

This section explains the connectors and connector pinouts for the AT-GS900/16 Fanless Gigabit
Ethernet Switch. Fig. 2-39 illustrates the pin layout to an RJ45 connector and port.
8
1 8
1
Fig. 2-39 RJ45 connector and port/pin layout
The table below lists the RJ45 connector pins and their signals when a 1000Base-T port is operating
at 1000 Mbps.
Pin Pair Signal

1 1 TX and RX+
2 1 TX and RX-
3 2 TX and RX+
4 3 TX and RX-
5 3 TX and RX+
6 2 TX and RX-
7 4 TX and RX+
8 4 TX and RX-
Table: RJ45 1000Base-T connector pinouts; bi-directional data on each pair.
2-30 Ed. 10.13

2.3 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
As a wide area multilateration system is required to cover airspace volumes of different sizes, a selec
tion of MAGS (or 'ADS-B/MLAT') antennas with different characteristics is required. These require
ments and the related antenna models offered by Thales are described within the following sections.
2.3.1 ADS-B / MLAT Optional Antennas, Overview

Omnidirectional antennas Sectorial antennas
Omni 030 Omni 060 Omni 115 Hemi 100 Sector 160
Fig. 2-40 ADS-B / MLAT antenna options, overview, not to scale
2.3.2 Omni 030; 3 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option)
The 3 dBi ADS-B / MLAT antenna is an omnidirectional RX/TX antenna for ADS-B and MLAT sys
tems. It is optimized for light weight and small size. Even if the antenna is optimized for receive-only
applications, it can handle transmissions up to 1 kW input at 4 % duty cycle. However, Thales recom
mends the 6 dBi omnidirectional antenna 'Omni 060' for transmission applications, since its beam
shape avoids ground bouncing effects.
Typical applications are:

S reception of ADS-B and MLAT signals at ground or TMA (Terminal Manoeuvring Area)
S no cone of silence
S interrogation of Mode S equipped targets on the ground and in the TMA up to mid ranges
S mounting on structures with limited static loading (e.g. light masts)
bottom view, connectors
RF out
ANTENNA
option
connector
N
RF out RF test in
(optional)
Fig. 2-41 Omni 030; optional omnidirectional antenna; 3 dBi
Ed. 10.13 2-31

2.3.3 Omni 060; 6 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option)

The 6 dBi ADS-B / MLAT antenna is an omnidirectional RX/TX antenna for ADS-B and MLAT sys
tems. It is recommended for small to medium range applications. Its vertical diagram avoids ground
bounces but still does not show a strong cone of silence overhead. It is the recommended antenna
type for transmissions used in ground based systems or in systems covering the airport TMA.

S reception of ADS-B and MLAT signals at ground or TMA (high-flying targets up to 80 NM)
S reduced cone of silence
S interrogation of Mode S equipped targets on the ground and in the TMA up to mid ranges
S mounting on structures with medium static loading (e.g. small transmission masts), where the
heavy antenna models can not be used
RF test in
(optional)
N optionN
P1 P2
RF
N
RF out
2.3.4 Omni 115, 11.5 dBi Omnidirectional ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option)
The 11.5 dBi ADS-B / MLAT antenna is an omnidirectional RX/TX antenna for ADS-B and MLAT sys
tems. It is optimized for long-range operation and for a reception avoiding sharp nulls in the cone
of silence. The antenna is derived from the Kathrein 880 10002 type antenna (mechanical structure,
cover, materials).
S reception of ADS-B and MLAT signals at long ranges exceeding 250 NM
S interrogation of Mode S equipped targets at long ranges exceeding 100 NM
S transmitting Mode S sync beacon signals over long ranges exceeding 100 NM

RF out
RF test in RF test in
ANTENNA
antenna connector
array N N N
M1 M2
mounting
clamp
OL
radome cover power supply for obstruction lights
2-32 Ed. 10.13

2.3.5 Hemi 100; 10 dBi Hemispherical ADS-B / MLAT Antenna (option)

The 10 dBi ADS-B / MLAT antenna is a hemispherical RX/TX antenna for ADS-B and MLAT systems.
It is optimized for long-range operation. The antenna is derived from the Kathrein 716 405 type an
tenna (mechanical structure, cover, materials) and is equipped with an additional 'diffusor' to achieve
a hemispherical coverage with a good front-to-back-ratio. It is typically used when mast-top posi
tions are not available or when sectorizing is necessary due to high traffic. This antenna has a slightly
lower gain like the high performance omnidirectional type, but it has a better performance for higher
elevated (and closer) targets.
S reception of ADS-B and MLAT signals at medium to long ranges (up to 250 NM)
S interrogation of Mode S equipped targets at medium to long ranges (up to 100 NM)
S transmitting Mode S sync beacon signals over medium to long ranges exceeding 100 NM
Fig. 2-44 Hemi 100; 10 dBi hemispherical antenna (option)
2.3.6 Sector 160; 16 dBi Sectorial High Performance Antenna (option)

The 16 dBi ADS-B / MLAT antenna is a sectorial RX/TX antenna for ADS-B and MLAT systems. It
is optimized for long-range operation. The antenna is derived from the Kathrein 716 405 type antenna
(mechanical structure, cover, materials). It performs the highest possible gain in the sector direction.
Fig. 2-45 Sector 160; 16 dBi sectorial antenna (option)
Ed. 10.13 2-33


S reception of ADS-B and MLAT signals at long ranges exceeding 250 NM
S selective reception of dedicated areas avoiding fruit from adjacent, high traffic areas
S interrogation of Mode S equipped targets at long ranges exceeding 100 NM
S transmitting Mode S sync beacon signals over long ranges exceeding 100 NM
S selective interrogation into a dedicated area avoiding RF 'pollution' of adjacent areas maintaining
the ICAO interrogation limits
2.3.7 GPS Antenna (option)
The GPS (Global Positioning System) input is used to receive GPS signals for time synchronisation
of the system and for position reference. MAGS ground stations are synchronised by different means,
one of them is GPS. The receiver unit is therefore equipped with an internal precision time GPS re
ceiver requiring a GPS antenna.
The active antenna P/N 72600 28001provides 36 dB gain and requires 5 V DC power supply via the
RF cable. This antenna is a high-quality single-frequency GPS antenna with integrated ground
plane designed for mounting on a pole. A standard mounting kit is included with the delivery.
The GPS antenna is a receiving antenna for the L1-band (1572.42 MHz). It receives the SIS signals
from the up to 24 satellites of the Global Positioning System. The antenna supplies the receiver unit
with the receive signal. The GPS antenna is an active unit which is supplied with +5 V DC by the an
tenna RF cable; this voltage supply is enabled by default all the time.
The antenna is mounted with four screws (M3) to an adapter. A mounting kit comprising a tube and
2 clamps is optionally available for elongation of the adapter pedestal and easier fixing to an appropri
ate support.
GPS antenna GPS antenna RF connector GPS antenna and mounting accessories
Type AT575 bottom view
GPS antenna
RF connector (TNC)
RF out
Gasket
GPS antenna adapter
TNC
Mounting Kit (option) with

mounting tube and
clamps (2x)
∅
990 mm 25 mm
Fig. 2-46 GPS antenna (option) with mounting accessories
2-34 Ed. 10.13

Weather Protection
If the received signal is too weak, the optional AAU can be used to increase the RF signal of a receiving
only antenna. The AAU cannot be used if the VHF antenna shall receive and transmit. The AAU is
mounted as close as possible to the receiving antenna with maximum cable length of 2 m. It serves
to optimize the system's signal-to-noise ratio and to compensate cable attenuation.
The AAU has a gain of approx. 15 dB and a noise figure below 0.7 dB. It is DC powered via the RF
output cable from the ground station's receiver.
The DC supply can be switched on/off by software. However, the system does not automatically rec
ognize if an AAU unit is present or not!
A passive lightning protector stub and a 1090 MHz bandpass filter are also part of the assembly as
shown in Fig. 2-47 below. To avoid overload, an optional HF limiter at the RF input is available.
NOTE: If the AAU is not powered up, it will not provide gain but will rather attenuate the signal.
Therefore it is crucial to verify that the supply voltage is available!
AAU assembled incl. mast fixing and cover 1 2 3 7a
11
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
8
10
9
AAU housing, opened
7 6 5 4
1 Filter (optional) 7 AAU housing base

2 Input limiter (optional) 7a AAU housing cover
3 Earthing cable between housing base and cover 8 Low-noise amplifier
4 Input connector, from VHF antenna, including 9 Mast fixing
lightning protector (optional) 10 Mounting base (part of cover)
5 Ground bolt 11 Weather protection (cover)
6 Output connector to SPU
Fig. 2-47 Optional Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) with mounting set (mast fixing and cover)
The AAU device including the mounting set (Figs. 2-47/9,10,11) comprises the housing with the Low
Noise Amplifier (LNA) and lightning protection for RF IN. It is available with following options:
- Ref. no. 83142 75200 AAU version with RF filter and mounting set
Ref. no. 83142 75210 AAU with RF filter without mounting set (optional)
- Ref. no. 83142 75300 AAU version with RF filter, RF input limiter and mounting set
Ref. no. 83142 75310 AAU with RF filter, RF input limiter without mounting set (optional)
Ed. 10.13 2-35

2.4 REMOTE/LOCAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (RCMS/LCMS)
The RCMS functionality is hosted on a standard PC platform (Fig. 2-48) under the operating system
Linux. The basic system includes the necessary software licenses as well as a suitable standard desk
top PC.
ADS-B Ground Station

Local Site
LAN
ATC Center
Remote Site
Fig. 2-48 RCMS subsystem configuration (example equipment)
2-36 Ed. 10.13

2.5 SUBASSEMBLIES OF THE 48 VDC GROUND STATION (OUTDOOR)

2.5.1 MacLean Air Conditioner (Option)
Product designation SPECTRACOOL Air Conditioner
Model G280648-G150 48 Volt
Short name MacLean air conditioner
Manufacturer Pentair/MacLean Technical Products (USA)
Document reference COTS manual [01]
The MacLean air conditioner is integrated in the front door of the outdoor cabinet. The setting of the
control elements is described in section 3.2.1 or in the aircon's COTS manual.
Operating the aircon below the minimum ambient temp. or above the maximum ambient tempera
tures indicated on the nameplate voids all warranties. It is recommended that the warranty section
of the COTS manual be read in order to familiarize yourself with parameters of restricted operation.
The moisture that the enclosure air can contain is limited. If moisture flows from the drain tube continu
ously this can only mean that ambient air is entering the enclosure. Be aware that frequent opening
of the enclosure's door admits humid air, which the air conditioner must then dehumidify.
Fig. 2-49 McLean air conditioner (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-37

2.5.1.1 Sequence of Operation
The air conditioner comes standard with two internally mounted thermostats or remote access con
trol. There are two modes of operation; heating and cooling. During heating and cooling modes the
evaporator fan will be running.
Heating
When the enclosure temperature is below the heating thermostat setpoint, power is applied to the
heaters. When the enclosure temperature is 10 degrees above the setpoint the heater is powered off.
Cooling
When the enclosure temperature is above the cooling thermostat setpoint, power is applied through
the thermostat. The compressor is then energized either directly or through a cont actor if unit requires
one. The condenser impellers will start immediately if the unit is not equipped with an optional head
pressure control switch. If the unit is equipped with an optional head pressure control switch, the con
denser impellers will start once the refrigerant pressure reaches the setting of the switch. Component
specific information is listed below.
When the enclosure temperature is above the cooling thermostat setpoint, power is applied through
the thermostat. The compressor is then energized either directly or through a contactor if unit requires
one. The condenser impellers will start immediately if the unit is not equipped with an optional head
pressure control switch. If the unit is equipped with an optional head pressure control switch, the con
denser impellers will start once the refrigerant pressure reaches the setting of the switch.
Operating the air conditioner below the minimum ambient temperature or above the maximum am
bient temperatures indicated on the nameplate voids all warranties. DO NOT set the enclosure ther
mostat to a temperature lower than 21 °C (70 F). Doing so can increase the likelihood of frost buildup
on the evaporator coil.
The moisture that the enclosure air can contain is limited. If moisture flows from the drain tube continu
ously this can only mean that ambient air is entering the enclosure. Be aware that frequent opening
of the enclosure's door admits humid air that the air conditioner must then dehumidify.
2-38 Ed. 10.13

2.5.2 Ethernet Switch (Option)
Product designation Ethernet Switch SFP Combo

Model 6 10/100/1000T + 2 10/100/1000T/ 100/1000 SFP Combo w/ X-Ring
Managed Switch
Short name Ethernet switch
Manufacturer Black box Corporation (USA)
Documentation ref. COTS manual [03]
Introduction
The 6 10/100/1000T + 2 10/100/1000T/ 100/1000 SFP Combo w/ X-Ring Managed Switch meets
the high reliability requirements demanded by industrial applications. The 6 10/100/1000T + 2
10/100/1000T/ 100/1000 SFP Combo w/ X-Ring Managed Switch can be easily managed through
the Web GUI. Using fiber port can extend the connection distance that increases the network elasticity
and performance. It also provides the X-Ring function that can prevent the network connection fai
lure.
Hardware Description
Physical Dimension
(W x D x H) is 72 mm x 105 mm x 152 mm
Front Panel
The front panel of the 6 10/100/1000T + 2 10/100/1000T/ 100/1000 SFP Combo w/ X-Ring Managed
Switch is shown below.
Fig. 2-50 Ethernet switch, front panel (option)
Ed. 10.13 2-39

Fig. 2-51 Ethernet switch; bottom panel (option)
Product features
- System Interface/Performance
- RJ45 ports support auto MDI/MDI-X function
- SFP (Mini-GBIC) supports 100/1000 Dual Mode
- Store-and-Forward switching architecture
- Back-plane (Switching Fabric): 16 Gbps
- 1Mbits Packet Buffer
- 8 K MAC Address Table
- Power Supply
- Input Power Isolation design for Telcom application, Pass Hi-Pot test~1.5 kV
- Wide-range Redundant Power Design
- VLAN
- Port Based VLAN
- Supports 802.1Q Tag VLAN
- GVRP
- Double Tag VLAN (Q in Q)
- Private VLAN
- Port Trunk with LACP
- QoS (Quality of Service)
- Supports IEEE 802.1p Class of Service
- Per port provides 4 priority queues
- Port Mirror: Monitor traffic in switched networks
- TX Packet only
- RX Packet only
- Both of TX and RX Packet
- Security
- Port Security: MAC address entries/filter
- IP Security: IP address security management to prevent unauthorized intruder
- Login Security: IEEE 802.1X/RADIUS
2-40 Ed. 10.13

- IGMP with Query mode for Multi Media Application

- Case/Installation
- IP-30 Protection
- DIN Rail and Wall Mount Design
- Spanning Tree
- Support IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree
- Support IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
- X-ring
- X-ring, Dual Homing, and Couple Ring Topology
- Provide redundant backup feature and the recovery time below 300 ms
- Bandwidth Control
- Ingress Packet Filter and Egress Rate Limit
- Broadcast/Multicast Packet Filter Control
- System Event Log
- System Log Server/Client
- SMTP e-mail Alert
- Relay Alarm Output System Events
- SNMP Trap
- Device cold start
- Power status
- Authentication failure
- X-ring topology changed
- Port Link up/Link down
- TFTP Firmware Update and System Configuration Restore and Backup
Ed. 10.13 2-41

2.5.3 TCP/IP Adapter (or SNMP Adapter) (Option)

Product designation TCP/IP Adapter (or SNMP adapter)
Model -
Short name TCP/IP Adapter
Manufacturer Benning Elektrotechnik und Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG (Germany)
Document reference COTS manual [02]
Function
The Remote Monitoring System MCU is a microprocessor-controlled monitoring and control device.
With this system, it is possible to monitor and control all the main components of a power supply sys
tem. For monitoring the power supply system via a computer network, the MCU can be extended via
the serial port with a TCP/IP adapter. The TCP/IP adapter therefore allows more rational and efficient
employment of maintenance and service personnel.
A flexible and user-dependent use as well as a significant volume reduction of each individual system
component have been the overall goal for the development of the components for this new series.
Bus systems/interfaces
The SUB-D interface X100* serves as interface to MCU1. The RJ45 interface X600 serves as interface
to the Ethernet network. This is a 10 MBit interface. The power supply of the adapter is effected via
X500 (9 ... 36 V DC, 2 W). The optional interfaces X10, X200, X400, X401 are currently not supported.
System requirements
The remote monitoring system MCU consists of various hardware and software components. Some
components are absolutely necessary, others are optional. The following description of the TCP/IP
adapter allows safe installation and commissioning of the system.
TCP/IP adapter
(SNMP adapter)
Fig. 2-52 TCP/IP adapter (SNMP adapter); marked with red dashed box (option)
2-42 Ed. 10.13

2.5.4 48 V DC Power Supply System MFR Benning (Option)
See also ref. document [04]: Manual of the Backup Power Supply System;
by Benning Elektrotechnik und Elektronik GmbH & Co. KG (Germany)
General
The Slimline Carrier 4500 and its Slimline Rectifier are compact 48 V power supply systems. This sys
tem features small size and a large permitted temperature range. The output power of the power sup
ply system can be extended in steps of 1.500 W by connecting up to 3 Slimline Rectifiers 1500 for
each Slimline Carrier 4500 and the parallel connection of several Slimline Carriers 4500. Up to three
Slimline Carriers 4500 can be controlled by one Slimline Control unit.
The functionality of the system is rounded off by the optional inclusion of an MCU remote monitoring
system which makes possible remote monitoring of the power supply system via a modem or TCP/IP
adapter.
The components
The layout of the individual components of the power supply system is fixed because of the compact
modular design. Depending on requirements different configurations are possible.
The individual components are (their individual short description follows on the next page):
1 to 3 Slimline Carrier with integrated mains filter; can be equipped with:
- 1 to 3 Slimline Rectifier 1500 (hot-plug) and
- 1 Slimline Control (hot-plug)
TCP / IP adapter Ethernet switch Benning power supply

(SNMP adapter) subsystems
Communication
subsystems
Slimline Carrier
Slimline
MCU Slimline Control Slimline Rectifier (1 ...3x)
Fig. 2-53 BENNING power supply and communication subsystems, front view (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-43

Slimline Control (Option)

The Slimline Control controls the Slimline Rectifier and the optionally connected distribution. The
Slimline Control organizes the data flow between the Slimline Rectifier and the optionally insertable
MCU.
Slimline Carrier 4500 (Option)

The Slimline Carrier 4500 is prepared for the installation of the Slimline Rectifier and the Slimline Con
trol .
Slimline Rectifier 1500 (Option)

The 48 V-Slimline Rectifiers 1500 feed the connected DC loads and charge/boost the connected
lead accumulator batteries at the same time. The slide-in units are hot-plug units, that means all
electrical connections are made and disconnected automatically when plugging and unplugging the
Slimline Rectifier 1500. There are no components in the Slimline Rectifier 1500 which need to be ac
cessible under normal operating conditions. See also section 2.5.5.
2.5.5 Slimline Rectifier 1500 (Option)

The 48 V Slimline Rectifiers 1500 feed the connected DC loads and charge/boost the connected lead
accumulator batteries at the same time. The slide-in units are hot-plug units, that means all electri
cal connections are made and disconnected automatically when plugging and unplugging the Slim
line Rectifier 1500. There are no components in the Slimline Rectifier 1500 which need to be accessi
ble under normal operating conditions. The following Fig. 2-54 shows the slide-in rectifier unit. Its
indication LEDs can be found at the front side.
front view
LED 1 LED 2
Fig. 2-54 Slimline Rectifier 1500 (option), slide-in rectifier unit (example)
The function of the two LED indicators (see Fig. 2-54) at the front side of the rectifier unit:
- LED 1 'Slimline Rectifier 1500 ready for operation/in operation'. If flashing, data are
transmitted between the Slimline Rectifier 1500 and the Slimline Control.
- LED 2 'Slimline Rectifier 1500 fault'
2-44 Ed. 10.13

2.5.6 Slimline Control (Option)

The Slimline Control controls the Slimline Rectifier and the optionally connected distribution. The
Slimline Control organizes the data flow between the Slimline Rectifier and the optionally insertable
MCU.
Fig. 2-55 Slimline Control (option), PC board unit (example)

The Slimline Control can be freely programmed via the service software. The standard programming
of the relays is as follows:
1 Connector X33
2 Connector X34
3 RJ45 plug; data connector for the connection to an external remote monitoring system MCU or
an additional Slimline Control.
2.5.6.1 Remote Monitoring System MCU (Option)

The Remote Monitoring System MCU is a microprocessor-controlled monitoring and control device.
With this system, it is possible to monitor and control all the main components of a power supply sys
tem.
For monitoring the power supply system via a computer network, the MCU can be extended via the
serial port with a TCP/IP adapter. The TCP/IP adapter therefore allows more rational and efficient em
ployment of maintenance and service personnel.
Fig. 2-56 Remote Monitoring System MCU, option (example)
Ed. 10.13 2-45

A flexible and user-dependent use as well as a significant volume reduction of each individual system
component have been the overall goal for the development of the components for this new series.
Using its internal software, the MCU unit is used to monitor the system voltage, which is 2.1 V/Z. Eight
ports are available to put in external error messages.
The MCU's main task is to monitor a certain voltage threshold.
Battery test can be started manually or automatically (intervals can be programmed). Via a voltage
step down at the rectifier units to 1.8 V per cell the battery discharge, the battery test programm is
initiated. If the discharge time is sufficiently long, the test result is positive. If the discharge time is too
short, the test result is negative. As a test result, discharge time, discharge voltage and taken out ca
pacity are reported.
The display in the front panel shows:
- System voltage
- System current
- Battery temperature / Battery current
The interface in the front panel provides:
- RS232
- Modem interface
2-46 Ed. 10.13

2.5.7 PowerSafe 12V170FS Monobloc Battery (Option)

Product designation PowerSafe 12V170FS Front Terminal Monobloc Battery
Model 12V170FS
Short name Backup Battery unit or Battery Set
Thales P/N 83131 72266
Manufacturer Enersys (USA)
Document reference COTS manuals [05]
Temperature
sensor
Battery - Battery +
Fig. 2-57 PowerSafe 12V170FS Front Terminal Monobloc Battery (example)
Description
The PowerSafe® 12V170FS MONOBLOC is a maintenance-free, valve-regulated lead acid battery.
It is suitable for 19” racking and provides high energy density. All electrical connections are located
at the front side.
Product Features
- 12 V, 170 Ah monobloc (C10/1.80 Vpc/20 °C); (Vpc = Volt per cell)
- Compact design and high energy density provides high back-up power in small space
- Front terminal connections for fast and easy installation and maintenance
- UL94 V-0 flame retardant case and lid
- Long design life
Technical Data
Nominal voltage 12 V
Nominal capacity 170 Ah by 1.8 V Upc / cell at 20° C
Temperature range -10... +45° C (precedence value 20° C)
Size of each block (LxWxH) 561 x 125 x 316 [mm]
Weight per block 67 kg
Weight of the set (4 blocks) approx. 268 kg
Amount of blocks 4 (all 4 blocks must have the same recharging date!)
Material of the case Acryl- Butadien-Styrol (ABS), impact-resistant
Accessories 3 block connectors (16 mm with M6 cable lug),
2 x M6 cable lug (crimp version) for 16 mm battery cable
connected to the fuse box, labels for plus and minus
terminal, cell numbers 1 to 4
Ed. 10.13 2-47

Design properties
- Positive plates designed to prolong service life and enhance corrosion resistance
- Separators in low resistance microporous glass fibre. The electrolyte is absorbed within this mate
rial, preventing acid spills in case of accidental damage
- Case and lid in flame-retardant ABS material, highly resistant to shocks and vibrations
- Terminal with brass insert for maximum conductivity and with high compression grommet for long
life
- Self-regulating pressure relief valve prevents ingress of atmospheric oxygen
- Flame arrestors built into each bloc for increased operational safety
- Rope handles fitted as standard for ease of handling Installation & Operation
- Recommended float charge voltage: 2.280 Vpc at 20 °C (68 °F) or 2.265 Vpc at 25 °C (77 °F)
- Six months shelf life at 20°C
- Reduced maintenance: no water addition required
Standards
- Tested according to international standard IEC 60896-21 and compliant to defined requirements
of IEC 60896-22
- Classified as 'Long Life' according to the Eurobat Guide 1999
- Designed to meet Telcordia SR-4228 requirements
- Recognized by UL (UL Standard 1989)
- Approved to be shipped as nonhazardous cargo in accordance with the requirements of IMDG
(International Maritime code for Dangerous Goods) and OICA (Organisation of International Civil
Aviation)
Fig. 2-58 Battery block connectors 16 mm with M6 cable lug (example)
2-48 Ed. 10.13

2.5.7.1 Battery Temperature Sensor (Option)

The GS outdoor cabinet is designed as a largely air-tight metal enclosure, due to the fact that it
should be well protected against the ingress of dust or dirt and other reasons. However, this design
makes it necessary to prevent the battery units from overheating by using aircon equipment. The bat
tery temperature is monitored by a temperature sensor (see Fig. 2-59).
Only a special type of temperature sensor may be fitted (2 kW/25 °C; model KTY81-210). This tempe
rature sensor is available ready for use with various line lengths. The installation of this sensor is de
scribed in section 3.1.17.
The temperature is not visible by a display on the battery station. You can only read the measured
temp by software.
Temperature
sensor
Battery - Battery +
Fig. 2-59 Cabinet rear, battery poles and temperature sensor (example)
2.5.7.2 Storage Conditions and Time

Store the batteries in a clean, cool, dry area. Batteries loose capacity during storage! In the users
interest the storage period should be as short as possible. The storage location should provide the
following functions:
- Shelter the cells / monoblocs from harsh weather and risk of flooding.
- Protect the batteries against any overheating risk induced by direct exposure to the sun radiation
or by their amplification through glass walls.
- Protect the batteries from any risk of electric shock resulting from shortcircuiting by a conductive
object or from a building up of conductive dust.
- Avoid any risk of mechanical shock caused by dropping objects onto the cell / monobloc or by
dropping the cell / monobloc itself.
- Avoid contamination of the lids by dust etc.
Ed. 10.13 2-49

- The storage temperature has an impact on the self-discharge rate. Hence, it is important to store
the batteries in a fully charged condition in a cool but frost-free room.
- Storage on a pallet wrapped in plastic material is authorized. It is not recommended however in

rooms where the temperature fluctuates significantly, or if high relative humidity can cause con
densation under the plastic cover. With time, this condensation can cause a whitish hydration on
the poles and lead to high self-discharge by leakage current. This hydration has no affect on the
battery operation or service life if no corrosion occurs.
- It is forbidden to stack one pallet above the other.
- Avoid storing unpacked cells / monoblocs on sharp-edged supports.
- It is recommended to have the same storage conditions within a batch, pallet or room.
- Appropriate inventory turnover based on a FIFO-method ('First In - First Out') will result in a
higher operating quality of the products.
- If the battery casings must be cleaned (prior to their installation) never use solvents or abrasives.
Use water (wet cloth) without additives.
See appendix A 1 and standard EN 50 2727-2 especially for battery room ventilation requirements.
2.5.7.3 Storage Time
The maximum storage time at 20 °C is 24 months for standard gel batteries.
The shorter storage time of solar-batteries is due to a small amount of phosphoric acid added to the
electrolyte. Phosphoric acid increases the number of cycles but increases the self-discharge rate
slightly. Higher temperatures cause higher self-discharge and shorter storage time between re
charging operations.
2.5.7.4 Installation
Install the batteries in accordance with the instructions and/or layout drawing, taking care to ensure
correct terminal location and polarity. On each bloc the positive and negative terminals are identified
with + and - symbols.
Connect the blocs with the connectors and fasteners provided. The fastener torque is specified on
the product label.
2.5.7.5 Deep Discharge Protection
Lead acid batteries must not be over-discharged. This is avoided by including a Low Voltage Discon
nect (LVD) switch in the circuit, see Fig. 2-60. Batteries are disconnected from the load when the end
discharge voltage is reached. Deep discharge relay dropout is < 43.2 V.
The deep discharge relay for the protection of the battery and the load relay are controlled and the
consumer load outputs are monitored via the Slimline Control which is fitted in the Slimline Carrier.
2-50 Ed. 10.13

LVD
Low Voltage
Disconnect
switch
Fig. 2-60 Battery deep discharge protection by LVD switch
2.5.7.6 Recharge
After a discharge the battery should be recharged as soon as possible. The battery must not be in
a discharged condition for more than 72 hours.
2.5.7.7 Disposal
PowerSafe batteries are recyclable. Scrap batteries must be packaged and transported in accor
dance with prevailing local, state and federal transportation rules and regulations.
2.5.8 Separate Test Transponder Equipment (TT), Option

The optional separate test transponder equipment can be additionally used to test the MLAT system
on line correct operation. The optional separate test transponder is a commercial general aviation
Mode S level 2 and Mode A/C transponder. An attenuator is added to match the transmitted power
to the surrounding GS-R sensitivity while avoiding unnecessary RF pollution.
Weather Protection
If the received signal is too weak, the optional AAU can be used to increase the RF signal of a receiving
only antenna. The AAU cannot be used if the UHF antenna shall receive and transmit. The AAU is
mounted as close as possible to the receiving antenna (cable length <2 m). It serves to optimize the
system signal-to-noise ratio and to compensate cable attenuation. It has a gain of approx. 15 dB
and a noise figure below 0.7 dB.
It is DC powered via the RF output cable from the ground station receiver unit. The DC supply can
be interrupted with a jumper on the SPB3 board of the AX 680 SPU. A passive lightning protector stub
and a 1090 MHz bandpass filter are also part of the assembly as shown in Fig. 2-61 below. To avoid
overload an optional HF limiter at the RF input is available.
Ed. 10.13 2-51

NOTE: If the AAU is not powered up, it will not provide gain but will attenuate the signal. Therefore
it is crucial to verify that the supply voltage is available.
The AAU device including the mounting set (Fig. 2-61/9,10,11) comprises the housing with Low
Noise Amplifier (LNA), lightning protection for RF IN, and is available with following options:
- Ref. no. 83142 75200 AAU version with RF filter and mounting set
Ref. no. 83142 75210 optional: AAU with RF filter without mounting set
- Ref. no. 83142 75300 AAU version with RF filter, RF input limiter and mounting set
Ref. no. 83142 75310 optional: AAU with RF filter, RF input limiter without mounting set
AAU assembled incl. mast fixing and cover 1 2 3 7a

1 Filter (optional)
2 Input limiter (optional) 11
3 Earthing cable between
housing base and cover
4 Input connector, from
Î
UHF antenna, including
lightning protector (optional)
5 Earthing bolt
ÎÎ
6 Output connector to SPU
7 AAU housing base 8
ÎÎ
7a AAU housing cover
8 Low-noise amplifier 10
9 Mast fixing 9
10 Mounting base (part of cover) 4
11 Weather protection (cover) 7 6 AAU housing, opened
5
Fig. 2-61 Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) with mounting set (mast fixing and cover)
2-52 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance Installation and Setup
CHAPTER 3
INSTALLATION AND SETUP
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 General
The installation of the ground station equipment and the RCMS equipment in the ATC centers de
pends on local conditions. The equipment can be easily integrated in existing environments (e.g. ex
isting buildings on remote sites or an ATC supervisor room). This means that the illustrations do not
show a concrete mounting procedure but the interconnection of the individual system items. Rec
ommendations and installation requirements are listed in section 3.1.10.
The environmental conditions, preparations and given technical facilities of the installation sites have
to be in accordance with the technical characteristics as described in chapter 1, section 1.3. Cables
indicated as 1) in Figs. 3-9 to 3-14 are provided by the customer. Also mounting facilities for equip
ment and antenna or cable run are to be provided by the customer. Verification test procedures after
site installation and a related installation report form are described in section 3.7.
NOTE: The modular design of an ADS-B Ground Station allows various equipment configura
tions within the 19” cabinets. This chapter is referenced to the exemplary configurations
of an basic AX 680 SPU and already configured systems such as a system in a small 19”
cabinet (10 HU) or a system in a medium standard 19” cabinet (24 HU). In individual con
figured systems with e.g. simply a core module SPU or an individual assembled system
in a 19” cabinet, not all contents may be applicable for the individual configuration. In this
case not applicable hardware and software component descriptions should be ignored.
3.1.2 Audience
This manual is intended for system operators and service technicians who have knowledge of elec
tronics, network technology and the basic concept of ADS-B technology. Some installation and
maintenance tasks require basic knowledge of Linux software and PC handling. Installation and main
tenance should be performed by experienced technicians only. New users are also recommended
to attend a Thales Training Course.
Qualification of Air Traffic Safety Electronics Personnel

(ATSEP) according to the guidelines of ICAO and Eurocontrol ESARR 5
Base Requirements/Prerequisites
Personnel qualification should be according to the guidelines of ICAO and Eurocontrol ESSAR 5.
The required qualification should be according to 'Air Traffic Safety Electronics Personnel (ATSEP)'
and 'Installation & Hardware Maintenance Personnel. The work force should also have experience
in the operation and maintenance of electronic equipment, and should have a working knowledge
of the basic principles of navigation systems, use of technical documents, computer technology and
their handling.
Ed. 10.13 3-1

Installation and Setup Description, Operation and M;aintenance
3.1.3 Required Times for Installation and Maintenance Jobs
LRU LRU Description MTTR [h]
AX 680 Family Elements
58142 30520 AX 680 Power Supply VAC 0.17
97541 28013 UPS 3000 VA/2100 W 0.50
97541 28015 Battery Pack for RT 3000 0.25
120703-0003 PTM1 - GPS 0.17
120764-0001 PTM2 - GPS 0.17
MAGS Ground Station in AX 680 configuration
83011 24048 Indoor 24 HE Receive only single channel 0.33
83011 24049 Indoor 24 HE 1AX 680 single 1TX 0.33
83011 24060 Indoor 24 HE Receive only dual channel 0.33
83011 24062 Indoor 24 HE 1 AX 680 dual 2 TX RFP 0.33
83011 24348 Outdoor Cabinet 1 AX 680
83011 24617 Indoor Wall mount 1AX 680 1 AN 1030 0.33
Antennas
72600 28001 GPS Antenna
97980 28192 High gain omni antenna. 11.5 dB gain
97980 28261 Omni antenna FAN 96. 9 dB gain without obstruction lights”
5489 00002 Medium gain omni antenna AAN186. 6 dB gain
616 31 995 Low gain omnidirectional antenna AAT3. 3dBi gain
97980 28130 Sector Antenna Kathrein FAN 88
58142 00003 Sector Antenna Kathrein with diffusor kit
58142 00002 Diffusor kit standalone
Central Elements
97991 28678 RCMS II PC 0.25
97991 28704 RCMS Monitor 19” DVI 0.25
97991 28666 LCMS Laptop UK Keyboard
Cisco switch 2950 0.17
Cisco switch 2950 / dual
97991 28664 CMS Mid range server 0.33
CMS Mid range server / dual
97991 28665 CPS High end server 0.33
CPS High end server / dual
3-2 Ed. 10.13

3.1.4 Hardware Items for Installation

The following table lists the hardware and software items of the ADS-B ground station.
Hardware item P/N Remark

Ground Station, configured 83011 24xxx various versions, assigned by the last 3 characters,
e.g. 83011 24600 means 10HU cab., 1 AX 680, 1 UPS
Individual items
Signal Processing Unit (AX 680) 83011 23100 Basic version, last three numbers (23xxx) indicate the
individual version, e.g. 23110 means with PTM modul.
Signal Processing Unit (SPU), standard subassemblies:
- AC/DC converter / Schroff P/N 13190-106 58142 30520
- Fan unit incl. dust filter 58142 30401
- Dust filter mat (part of fan unit) 58142 30411 spare part
- SPB3 (1090) 83142 74200 prepared for 1090 MHz operation
Signal Processing Unit (SPU), optional subassemblies:
- PTM1 (option) 120703-0003
- PTM2 (option) 120764-1001
- DC/DC converter 24V / P/N 13190-156 (option) 58142 30540 standard, can be used together with AC/DC converter
- DC/DC converter 48V / P/N 13190-107 (option) 58142 30530 kit, label '48VDC' added to supersede the 24V mark
Optional system equipment
Mounting kit for 19” rack 22731 28001 consists of 4 screws, 4 washers, 4 cage nuts
Exchange Panel 4/2 for mount into 19” racks (option) 35490 28066 used to interconnect RF cables or Data cables
RF divider 49915 28050 used with 1 Rx antenna and 2 SPU
- Kit RF divider incl. cables and mounting screws 58142 00001 prepared for Exchange Panel 35490 28066
Uninterruptible Power Supply Xanto RT1000 97541 28011 Battery included, no external battery pack
Adapter SNMP UPS WEB/SNMP manager CS121 58142 00420 plug-in to RT1000 and RT2000
DW5SNMP30 Pro
Uninterruptible Power Supply Xanto RT2000 97541 28012 needs min. 1 Battery pack 97541 28014
UPS Xanto RT2000 Battery pack 97541 28014 including battery connection cable
Temperature sensor (connects to SNMP manager board) 58142 00430 used to measure cabinet temperature
UPS Xanto (X)S 1000R control unit 58142 00400 including battery connection cable
UPS Xanto (X)S 1000R battery pack 58142 00410 including battery connection cable
UPS Xanto (X)S 1500R control unit 58142 00401 including battery connection cable
UPS Xanto (X)S 1500R battery pack 58142 00411 including battery connection cable
Gigabit ETH switch 58142 00300 Cisco SRW2016-K9
Optional peripheral equipment

Omni 115 antenna (gain 11.5 dBi), omnidirectional 97980 28192
Omni 060 antenna (gain 6 dBi), omnidirectional 548 900 002
Omni 030 antenna (gain 3 dBi), omnidirectional 61631 995
Hemi 100 antenna (gain 10 dBi), sectorial 180°, modified 58142 00003 with diffusor kit P/N 58142 00002
Sector 160 antenna (gain 16 dBi), sectorial, 66° 97980 28130 without diffusor kit 58142 00002
Option: Mounting frame for antenna xxxxx xxxxx used individually for antenna mounting on site
AAU (Antenna Amplifier Unit) 83142 75200 incl. housing with LNA, lightning protection, RF filter;
AAU mounting set
- Option: AAU incl. RF filter without mounting set 83142 75210
Ed. 10.13 3-3

Optional peripheral equipment cont.

AAU (Antenna Amplifier Unit) 83142 75300 incl. housing w. LNA, lightning prot, RF filter, limiter;
AAU mounting set
- Option: AAU incl. RF filter, limiter 83142 75310 without mounting set
Optional peripheral equipment (cont.)
Option: AAU mounting set only (mast fixing / cover) 35380 28051/50
GPS antenna (option) 72600 28001
Mounting kit for GPS antenna 58142 50020 incl. mounting tube 34450 28021, 2 clamps
Cable set (optional) xxxxx xxxxx refer to 3.1.7.
Cabinets P/N Remark

ADS-B 19” cabinet (24HU), pre-assembled with cabling 83142 28100 medium standard version
- Cable set 24HU cabinet internal (optional)
ADS-B 19” cabinet (10HU), pre-assembled with cabling 83142 28300 small version, wall mount
ADS-B 19” cabinet (24HU), pre-assembled with cabling 83142 28xxx low cost medium version
3.1.5 Hardware Items for RCMS Installation and LCMS

Hardware items RCMS P/N Remark
Standard Personal Computer 97991 28711
Additional subassemblies for the standard PC:
- Graphics adapter, dual head -
- Dual Ethernet adapter 0, 1 -
TFT-LCD screen monitor 97991 28602
Cable items Remark
Cable set RCMS xxxxx xxxxx Network cables, dual VGA-cable, power cables
Hardware items LCMS
Standard LCMS Computer 97991 28705 Laptop
3.1.6 ADS-B System Cabling
The following table lists the RF and LAN cabling set items of the Ground Station. Mains power cables
and earthing cables are not listed. These are items of the pre-assembled 19” cabinet cable set.
Hardware items available P/N Remark

BITE exchange SPU A to SPU B, RJ12, 6/6 to RJ12, 6/6 xxxxx xxxxx
Ethernet cable (standard), 10/100Base-T, RJ45, 8/8 (1 m) 24027 28003 SPU - to comm. network, other length available
RF cables used in 19” cabinets

RF cable SPU1/SPB3 to RX antenna, SMA-N 27288 04306 RFin to exchange panel
RF cable SPU2/SPB3 to RX antenna, SMA-N 27288 04307
RF cable SPU1/SPB3 to RX antenna probe, SMA-N 27288 04300 TTout to exchange panel
RF cable SPU2/SPB3 to RX antenna probe, SMA-N 27288 04301
RF cable SPU1/PTM to GPS antenna, SMA-N 27288 04304 RFin to exchange panel
RF cable SPU2/PTM to GPS antenna, SMA-N 27288 04305
3-4 Ed. 10.13

Optional RF cables (continued)
RF cable SPU to RX antenna, SMA-N 27288 04141 to opt. exch. panel, lengthening customer-defined
RF cable SPU to RX antenna probe, SMA-N 27288 04141 to opt. exch. panel, lengthening customer-defined
RF cable SPU to GPS antenna, SMA-N 27288 04140 to opt. exch. panel, lengthening customer-defined
Optional cables LCMS
LCMS serial cable, 24028 28003 LCMS connection, programming; suitable for SPB3
SubD/9pin to MicroSubD/9pin, crossed connection
LCMS Ethernet cable (standard), 24028 28004 LCMS connection to SPU aux. ETH2 interface
10/100Base-T, RJ45, 8/8, crossover
LCMS console cable, CAT.6, 8-pole, shielded, 24039 28667 LCMS connection, programming. From SPB3A 'CON
RJ45 to SubD/9pin; length 2.5 m SOLE' or 'ETH2' or 'MAINT' to Laptop PC (LCMS)
LCMS Serial to USB adapter cable (optional), 24028 28007 LCMS connection, adapter Serial to USB only
SubD/9pin to USB A (used together with cable p/n 24028 28003)
3.1.7 Ground Station System Cabling Set Definition
for SPB3
Laptop Serial
SPU serial
1 1
RxD 2 2 RxD
TxD 3 3 TxD
4 4
GND 5 5 GND
6 6
approx. 2 m 7 7 RTS
RTS
SubD, 9pin, male LiYCY 8x0.14 MicroSubD, 9pin, male CTS 8 8 CTS
9 9
1 5 1 5
6
6
Shield
front view front view
Fig. 3-1 24028 28003, LCMS serial cable, SubD/9pin to MicroSubD/9pin, crossed
SPU, ETH2, auxiliary LCMS TXD+ 1 1 RXD+

TXD- 2 2 RXD-
RXD+ 3 3 TXD+
not used 4 4 not used
RXD- 6 6 TXD-
approx. 1.8 m not used 8 8 not used
RJ45 8/8 LiYCY 8x0.14 RJ45 8/8
1 front view 1 front view
NOTE: Standard color: yellow; actual color may differ.
Fig. 3-2 24028 28004, LCMS Ethernet cable (standard), 10/100Base-T, RJ45, 8/8, crossover
Ed. 10.13 3-5

RXB/TXB; Battery Ctrl / Console LCMS
for SPB3A 1 3
2 2
3 1
4 NC
5 4
6 5
approx. 2.5 m 7 7
CAT5e 8
9
6
8
5 1
1
RJ45 SubD9
RJ45 SubD9, female
Fig. 3-3 24039 28667, serial maintenance cable, 8-pole, SPB3A to LCMS
SPU RS232
Laptop USB
DCD 1
Serial to USB RxD 2
TxD 3
converter DTR 4 1 Vcc+
GND 5 2 data-
approx. 300 mm Converter 3 data+
DSR 6
RTS 7 4 GND
SubD, 9pin, female USB A, male CTS 8
RI 9
1 5
6 Design example; actual may differ.

front view front view1
NOTE: The serial-to-USB adapter is to connect together with cable 24028 28003 (see Fig. 3-1) to the SPU, MicroSubD connector.
Fig. 3-4 24028 28007, LCMS serial to USB adapter cable, SubD/9pin to USB A, optional
ADS-B RX antenna AAU
approx. 2 m
recommended: Cellflex 1/2”
N-Type, male N-Type, male
Fig. 3-5 27288 04059, ANT AAU cable, RF, N-N
Exchange panel (optional) SPU/SPB3 or PTM
approx. 1.2 m
recommended: Suhner S-series
N, straight panel bulkhead SMA, right angle plug
cable plug
NOTE:
SPU (SPB3) to RX antenna: 27288 04141 or 27288 04300, ...04301, ...04306, ...04307 (used in 19” cabinets)
SPU (PTM) to GPS antenna: 27288 04140 or 2728804304, ...04305 (used in 19” cabinets)
Fig. 3-6 Ground Station internal RF cable (N/SMA) to exchange panel
3-6 Ed. 10.13

3.1.8 Interconnection of ADS-B Subsystems
RCMS PC
TSD
example HP
Monitor 1
NEOVO-TFT
PS/2
230VAC
RS232
Parallel
230VAC VGA 1 VGAint
Keyboard * Mouse*
USB
rear view 4x
Power cable Audio

Power cable
DVI cable
Dual DVI
Eth 0 Eth 1
MCS Mains sockets

230 VAC
Monitor 2
NEOVO-TFT
230VAC VGA 2
rear view
to/from dual
MLAT-LAN
1)
rear view
1)
Mains 230 VAC
Power cable 1) local supply
1)
1) Provided by customer * optional PS/2 connection ** optional for maintenance use
Fig. 3-7 RCMS, system cabling (example)
Mains fuse DC supply fuse SPU subrack, rear

3.2AT/250V (2x) 10AT/250 V (2x)
VAC 85V...264V 18...36 VDC
I minus (-)
0
plus (+)
Mains switch AC
1) PE
1)
nom. 230 VAC
nom. 24 VDC
AC-Power DC-Power
local supply local supply
mains 1)
1)
Equipped with AC/DC-converter Equipped with DC/DC-converter (option)
standard Can be used together with AC supply
1) Provided by customer
Fig. 3-8 Ground station, AX 680 SPU, power connection AC and DC, rear side (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-7

3.1.8.1 Example Configuration with Core Unit AX 680 SPU
RX antenna NOTE: GPS antenna (option)

high gain bottom view
RF cable to RX antenna: 1/2 cellflex or similar
bottom view RF cable to GPS antenna: 1/4” cellflex or similar
not used** not used
* Connector definitions: N, SMA, TNC, N+LP, MicroSub
ANTENNA
LP=Lightning protection
connector RF out
N N N
TNC
M1 M2
27288 04059
AAU
RF out PE RF in
+12V DC in LP
1)
N* N*
OL
1)
1) up to 2m 1)
up to 30 m
not used up to 10 m
N+LP N+LP N+LP
outdoor
N N
indoor
1) 27288 04140
1) N N 27288 04141
N N 27288 04141
Used if test transmission is applicated
Exchange panel (option)
SubD 15pin MicroSubD
MAINT ETH2 TX CONSOLE
SMA
TT out RF in
RF in
SMA
AX 680, front
Maintenance Programming
24028 28004 24028 28003
27288 04140
AX 680, rear LCMS
RJ45 8/8
NET2 NET1
90 to 264 VAC
I
0
1) 1)
24027 28003 1)
1) AC 230 V nom.
local AC mains supply
comm. network
1) Provided by customer ** if test transmission application is not used
Fig. 3-9 System cabling ground station AX 680 with GPS option, basic configuration (example)
3-8 Ed. 10.13

3.1.8.2 System Configuration in the Small 19” Cabinet (10 HU)
ADS-B RX antenna NOTE: GPS antenna

bottom view RF cable to RX antenna: 1/2 cellflex or similar bottom view
not used** not used RF cable to GPS antenna: 1/4” cellflex or similar
ANTENNA
connector
N N N * Connector definitions: N, SMA, TNC, N+LP, MicroSub
LP=Lightning protection RF out
M1 M2
TNC
AAU
RF out PE
LP
+12V DC in 27288 04059
OL
1) RF in up to 2m
N* N*
1)
1) not used 1)
up to 30 m up to 10 m outdoor
N+LP N+LP N+LP indoor
1) 1) 1) small cabinet 10HU
Used if test transmission is applicated
Monitor1 RXU1 GPS1
Exchange Panel
27288 04300 27288 04306
AX 680, front
27288 04304
AX 680 , rear
RJ45 8/8
NET2 NET1
90 to 264 VAC
I
0
1)
RJ45 Ethernet, SNMP (UPS) RJ45 Ethernet

24027 28004 24027 28003
temp. sensor manager (option)
Cabinet door
switch, front
COM2 AUX
Ethernet
RJ45
SNMP Status door
UPS RT1000 rear
Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS, front side of cabinet Earth
PE
small cabinet 10HU RJ45
Mains terminals
1) Provided by customer ** if test transmission application is not used to ADS-B Network
Fig. 3-10 System cabling ground station AX 680 in 19” cabinet 10HU with 1 UPS (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-9

3.1.8.3 System Configuration in the Medium Standard 19” Cabinet (24HU)

ADS-B RX antenna NOTE: GPS antenna 1
bottom view RF cable to RX antenna: 1/2 cellflex or similar bottom view
not used RF cable to GPS antenna: 1/4” cellflex or similar
ANTENNA
connector * Connector definitions: N, SMA, TNC, N+LP, MicroSub
N N N
LP=Lightning protection RF out
M1 M2
TNC
AAU
RF out PE
LP
+12V DC in 27288 04059
OL
1) RF in up to 2m up to 10 m
N* N*
1)
not used
1) 1)
N+LP N+LP up to 30 m N+LP outdoor
indoor
1)
19” cabinet 24HU
1) Exchange Panel RJ45 Ethernet
Used if
test transmission
is applicated Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 mains to UPS 1)
Power OUT
230V~ 5AT
1) with Fuse
MAINS
2 x 10A
Main Power IN
1)
Rx/Tx1 Rx/Tx2 Rx/Tx3 Rx/Tx4 COMMS 1 COMMS 2 230V~ 16A
24027 28003 GND
27288 04304
27288 04300 27288 04306 24027 28003
NET1 NET2
AX 680, front SPU RJ45 Ethernet, SNMP (UPS)
Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS
24027 28004
Cabinet door switch

COM2 AUX
rear front
Ethernet
RJ45
SNMP
UPS RT2000 (2)
Status doors
UPS Batt. pack (2)
230 VAC
19” cabinet 24HU

External mains
1) Provided by customer to ADS-B Network
Fig. 3-11 System cabling ADS-B, config. with 1 AX 680, 1 VHF RX antenna, 1 UPS (example)
3-10 Ed. 10.13

ADS-B RX antenna NOTE: GPS antenna 1 GPS antenna 2

bottom view RF cable to RX antenna: 1/2 cellflex or similar bottom view bottom view
RF cable to GPS antenna: 1/4” cellflex or similar
ANTENNA
connector * Connector definitions: N, SMA, TNC, N+LP, MicroSub
N N N
RF out RF out
M1 M2
TNC TNC
AAU
RF out PE
+12V DC in LP 27288 04059
OL
1) RF in up to 2m up to 10 m up to 10 m
N* N*
1) 1)
not used
1) 1)
N+LP N+LP up to 30 m N+LP N+LP outdoor
indoor
1) 1)
1) 1) 19” cabinet 24HU

Used if Exchange Panel
test transmission
is applicated Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2
Power OUT
230V~ 5AT
with Fuse
RF Divider MAINS
49915 28050 2 x 10A
Main Power IN
to SPU1 and 2 (NET1)

GND
27288 04305
27288 04300 27288 04304
27288 04306 27288 04307
27288 04301
AX 680, front SPU 2 27288 04305
Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS to UPS 2
27288 04300 27288 04306
AX 680, front SPU 1 27288 04304
Fuse 10 A
19” cabinet 24HU Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS to UPS 1
1) Provided by customer
Fig. 3-12 System cabling ADS-B (1), config. with 2 AX 680, 1 VHF RX antenna, 2 UPS (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-11

RJ45 8/8
AX 680 (2)
NET2 NET1
90 to 264 VAC
I
0
1)
24027 28003 RJ45 Ethernet

Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 8x
RJ45 8/8
AX 680 (1)
NET2 NET1
90 to 264 VAC
I
0
1)
24027 28003 RJ45 Ethernet

1) Hub
Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 8x
24027 28004 COM2 AUX
Ethernet
RJ45
SNMP
UPS RT2000 (2)
UPS Batt. pack (2)
24027 28004
COM2
COM2 AUX
AUX
temp. sensor
(option)
Ethernet
Cabinet door switch RJ45
rear front SNMP
UPS RT2000 (1)
UPS Batt. pack (1)
Status doors
Exchange Panel
Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2
Power OUT
230V~ 5AT
with Fuse
MAINS
2 x 10A
Earth bar
Main Power IN PE
Rx/Tx1 Rx/Tx2 Rx/Tx3 Rx/Tx4 COMMS 1COMMS 2 230V~ 16A 1)
230 VAC
19” cabinet 24HU GND

1) External mains
1) Provided by customer to ADS-B Network 1)
3-12 Ed. 10.13

ADS-B RX antenna 1 NOTE: ADS-B RX antenna 2 GPS antenna (1) GPS antenna (2)
RF cable to RX antenna: bottom view bottom view
bottom view 1/2” cellflex or similar bottom view
not used RF cable to GPS antenna: not used
ANTENNA 1/4” cellflex or similar ANTENNA
connector connector
N N N LP=Lightning protection N N N
RF out RF out
M1 M2 M1 M2
27288 04059 27288 04059 TNC TNC
up to 2m up to 2m
AAU AAU
RF out PE RF out PE 1) 1)
LP LP
OL +12V DC in OL +12V DC in
up to 10 m
N*
1) RF in
N* N*
1) RF in
N*
not used not used

1) 1) 1) 1)
up to 30 m
up to 30 m outdoor
N+LP N+LP N+LP N+LP indoor N+LP
N+LP
1) Used if 1)
1) test transmission 1)
1) is applicated
1)
Exchange Panel 19” cabinet 24HU
Used if
test transmission
is applicated Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2
Power OUT
230V~ 5AT
with Fuse
MAINS
2 x 10A
Main Power IN
to SPU (NET1)
GND
27288 04305
27288 04300 27288 04304
27288 04306 27288 04307
27288 04301
AX 680, front SPU 2 27288 04305
Fuse 10 A
Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS
to UPS 2
AX 680, front SPU 1

27288 04304
Fuse 10 A
19” cabinet 24HU
1) Provided by customer Mains sockets 230 VAC via UPS to UPS 1
Ed. 10.13 3-13

3.1.9 Installation Cabling of the 48 V DC Ground Station Cabinet

Some cabling examples of the 48 VDC power supply option are depicted below. This cabling configu
ration applies to the cabinets with 48 VDC power supply option; used for the cabinets P/N 83011
24770 and 83011 24771.
19” cabinet 29 HU
AX 680, front
NET1
TX1
TXU (NSTX), front (option)
TX1 TX2 NET1
THALES
NSTX
NSTX
N ETh SMA
Console RX
ANT ETH
24027 28003 24027 28003 (omit if no NSTX is fitted)
Black Box
Ethernet switch,
front view
Ethernet
Overvoltage Ethernet cables
24027 28004
Protector 24027 28003 1 m
@ EXP 24027 28003 24027 28004 1 m
SNMP adapter 12 VDC supply - Benning 734876
Benning Modular System SMS 4500

X3 pin 1,2
SNMP MCU Slimline Control
X131 X100 X34 X2 X27 X34
Benning 734624 Benning
Intrusion detection Cabinet temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor

door contacts + 1.6 m cable Benning + 2.5 m cable Benning
pre-wired SCHROFF P/N 751276 P/N 751146
to MCU X100 pin 1,9 to MCU X34 pin 1,2 to MCU X134 pin 1,2
Cabling configuration used with 48 VDC cabinets (example)
Fig. 3-15 Signal cabling GS-T: 1 AX 680, 1 NSTX, Black Box ETH switch (example)
3-14 Ed. 10.13

UHF RX antenna GPS antenna

bottom view bottom view
ANTENNA not used
connector NOTE:
N N N RF cable to RX antenna: 1/2 cellflex or similar
RF cable to GPS antenna: 1/4” cellflex or similar RF out
M1 M2 Other types can be defined according local requirements.
* Connector definitions: N, SMA, TNC, N+LP, MicroSub
TNC
2) depends on value of reverse power,
measured on site (< +24 dBm)
OL
up to 10 m
1) up to 30 m 1)
not used
N+LP N+LP NOTE: Using the TXU NSTX, regard to adapt the lightning protector
N+LP
pills: use 900 V type for TX and 90 V for GPS receiver and TT monitor
path. 1)
1)
Used if 19” cabinet 29 HU

test transmission outdoor
is applicated ETH
option
Mains
900V 90 V 90 V
Cable gland
LP LP LP
N N N
Cable
gland
RX/TX1 GPS1 MON 1
GND
Exchange panel,
cabinet bottom
27288 04320
Low
Pass
Filter
27288 04336
27288 28654
TXU (NSTX) (option), rear
NET1 TX2 TX1
0
0
I
AC in DC in
TXU (NSTX) (option), front
ANT
NSTX RX
N Console
ETH
27288 04338
10 dB attenuator
AX 680, front TTout RF in
In case of cabinet without NSTX:
- omit the Low Pass Filter
- omit the RF cable P/N 27288 04336
RF input - omit the RF cable P/N 27288 04338
- omit the attenuator on TT out of
27288 04324 SPB3 board
AX 680, rear
RJ45 8/8 - use the RF cable P/N 27288 04326
90 to 264 VAC NET2 NET1
I
TX1 to connect antenna from EXP/OVP
0
TX2 to SPB 3 RF-in directly
- only use the AX capsule 90 V
Cabling configuration used with 48 VDC cabinets (example)
Fig. 3-16 RF cabling GS-T: 1 AX 680, 1 NSTX; used with 48 VDC cabinets (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-15

W6
McLean A/C via F6 32A
W5 not used F5 32A

W4 not used F4 16A
W3
NSTX via F3 16A
Benning SMS 4500 W2 ETH switch via F2 10A
distribution unit +
MCU co-mounted W1 AX 680 SPU via F1 10A
with carrier module;
rear view + - +B- +A-
(1) (1) (1) (3) (3) (3) (4) (5) (5)

(2)
+F6- +F5- +F4- +F3- +F2- +F1-
W9-1 W8-1
N1. N2 and N3 need to be connected to N. W9-2 W8-2
Connector will be delivered as part of the
equipment. Pre-wired by Benning
PE L3 N3 L2 N2 L1 N1
W7
Benning carrier module SMS 4500 connected to chassis ground

To mains 3 phase
@ cabinet power dis H07G-FG 5*2.5 mm2 with up to 3 AC/DC converters and
tribution panel SLIMLINE Control unit; rear view The 48 VDC battery kit compri
ses the interbattery connec
W10 tions and the venting kit.
Battery 12 V Battery 12 V Battery 12 V Battery 12 V
62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah Battery 12 V Battery 12 V Battery 12 V Battery 12 V
62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah 62 ... 170 Ah
Battery Block #2 (optional) Battery Block #1
Explanation of the callout numbers of the Benning SMS 4500 distribution unit (rear view):
(1) Connector for load fuses F6, F5, F4
(2) + terminal; copper bar for connecting the Slimline Carrier
(3) Connector for load fuses F3, F2, F1
(4) - terminal; copper bar for connecting the Slimline Carrier
(5) Connector for battery fuses B, A
Fig. 3-17 48 VDC cabling; used with 48 VDC cabinets (example)
3-16 Ed. 10.13

@ Benning SMS 4500 distribution unit
-
W1 P/N 24039 28670
PHOENIX AX 680
Provided by SCHROFF
IPC DC connector
H07V-K 1.5 mm2 together with AX 680 enclosure
16/2-ST-10.16 SCHROFF
P/N 1969373
+
Wire end sleeve
Wire end sleeve
- A 1.5...10
A 1.5...10
DIN 46228
Ethernet switch
DIN 46228 W2 P/N 24039 28671
PHOENIX Black Box LIG612A
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16 redundant supply
H07V-K 1.5 mm2
P/N 1969373 terminal
Black Box: 12...24 AWG -> 0.25...4 mm2
+
-
W3 P/N 24039 28670 NSTX
PHOENIX
DC connector Provided by SCHROFF
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16
H07V-K 1.5 mm2 SCHROFF together with NSTX enclosure
P/N 1969373
+
-
PHOENIX
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16
P/N 1969373
Phoenix connectors IPC 16/2-ST-10, 16 are
+ provided as part of the Benning SMS 4500/13500
system; CRIMPFOX 16 S tool has to be used, see
- datasheet
PHOENIX
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16
P/N 1969373
+
Wire end sleeve Wire end sleeve
- A 1.5...10 A 1.5...10
DIN 46228 W6 P/N 24039 28672 DIN 46228
PHOENIX McLean
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16 Air Conditioner
P/N 1969373
H07V-K 10 mm2 DC Terminal
+
Wire end sleeve
M6
- A 1.5...10
DIN 46228 W8-1 P/N 24039 28674 Two M6 cable lugs are provided
PHOENIX
with the battery set accessory kit
IPC 16/2-ST-10.16
H07V-K 16 mm2
P/N 1969373
W8-2 P/N 24039 28675
+
W7 P/N 24039 28673
Battery ground (+) H07V-K gn/ye
Fig. 3-18 DC cabling; used with 48 VDC cabinets (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-17

3.1.10 Mounting Requirements and Recommendations
NOTE: Before connecting external power supply cables (DC or AC) to the equipment, verify that
the external power is switched off. Set also the power switches at the devices to off.
3.1.10.1 Installation Notes to Ground Station (SPU) and Antenna Amplifier Unit
- ADS-B ground station AX 680 SPU: If the the RX section of the SPB3 subassembly in the SPU
is intended to be used without an Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) or other equipment is connected
to it, internal jumper X13 of the SPB3 needs to be set 'open'. Otherwise it has to be set 'closed'.
Refer to section 4.4.11 for location of X13.
- Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU): The optional AAU requires a 12 VDC power supply. Otherwise it will
not provide any gain and attenuate the signal instead. If the AAU is supplied by the AX 680, jumper
X13 on the AX 680/SPB3 must be set 'closed'. If next to the ADS-B RX antenna a TX antenna is
installed, the AAU should comprise the RF limiter option to avoid RF input overload.
- The recommendations are valid for all channels even though only one channel is referred to.
3.1.10.2 Installing, Commissioning and Configuring the optional UPS Battery

XS 1000R
While transport to the installation site, the battery packs usually go separately from the ADS-B
ground station cabinet because of their high weight. The site installation process therefore includes
the re-mounting of all battery packs. The necessary work steps can are explained in section 3.5
'Installing the rack model' of the XS 1000R's COTS manual [1] and following sections.
Commissioning is explained in section 3.6 of the COTS manual [1].
The configuration of the battery settings can generally be set to AUTO modes, if no other special re
quirements have to fulfilled. According to COTS manual section 4.8.1 'Configuring the UPS system
for battery modules', set the numbers of battery strings like the recommended data in Table 5 'Number
of battery rows'. One of the AUTO configuring features cares for the automatic system's adaption of
the mains frequency for example 60 Hz or 50 Hz.
3-18 Ed. 10.13

3.1.10.3 Installing the Indoor Equipment of the Ground Station (SPU and TXU)
This section contains general procedures for installation of the equipment in the shelter or building.
It does not describe specific customer installations or customer defined cabling.
To mount the SPU in the provided Ground Station location (e.g. 19” rack)
S Fix the SPU with the supplied mounting material (screws, nuts and washers).
S Be sure that the air inlet and the air outlet on both sides of the SPU are free (minimum distance
to rack cover: 40 mm).
S If optionally used: Mount the exchange panel option at the back side of the rack (if possible) with
the supplied mounting material.
S Connect the connector ’RF in’ of the SPU/SPB3 and, if GPS option is used, the GPS antenna con
nector 'RF in' of the SPU/PTM to the exchange panel option with the adapter cables 27288 04140
and 27288 04141 (see Figs. 3-11, 3-14).
If test transmission function is used, connect the connector 'TTout' of the SPU/SPB3 to the exchange
panel option with the adapter cable 27288 04141 or 27288 04300. Use an attenuator (3, 6 or 10 dB)
at the connector 'TTout' to limit measured reverse power (< 24 dBm).
S Connect the SPU to an AC supply or/and if applicated a DC supply (see Fig. 3-11, 3-12).
3.1.10.4 Installing the Cabling within the Shelter or Building
S All inputs of the Ground Station provide secondary surge protection. They require primary protec
tion means at the shelter entry point. All RF cables shall be as short as possible, loops have to be
avoided. All RF cables shall be equipped with N-type male connectors. The communication net
work connection to the CPS/CMS/RCMS is provided by a customer supplied router on site.
Install the following cables:
S from Exchange Panel option (or directly from SPU or TXU) to shelter/building entry (RF from RX/TX
antenna): the characteristics shall be similar to 1/2” cellflex (attenuation < 8 dB/100 m), the cable
length shall not exceed 10 m (i.e. attenuation > 0.8 dB). Longer cables are possible. In this case,
a budget calculation is required.
S GPS option: from Exchange Panel option (or directly from SPU) to shelter/building entry (from GPS
antenna); the characteristics shall be similar to 1/4” cellflex (attenuation <15 dB/100 m), the cable
length shall not exceed 10 m ((i.e. attenuation > 1.5 dB). Longer cables are possible. In this case,
a budget calculation is required.
S LAN connection: from main Ethernet interface RJ45 connector NET1 (SPU rear) to MAGS commu
nication network, e.g. customer supplied network router.
Ed. 10.13 3-19

Installation and Setup Description, Operation and Maintenance
3.1.10.5 Installing the SPU Power Supply (AC/DC Converter, DC/DC Converter)
The standard and optional SPU Power Supply units are described in section 2.1.4. To safely install
and operate the converter(s), the following notes must be observed.
ATTENTION
Danger of Hardware Damage. To maintain SELV requirements, the outputs should not be
connected together in any manner which causes the total output voltage to exceed
60 VDC.
S To avoid damages, always apply the correct input voltage. The warranty is subject to correct input
voltages being applied.
S Intended Use; Grounding
The converter units are intended exclusively for installation within the AX 680 SPU by professional
installers. These are Class I power supplies; the ground pin of input connector J1 must be properly
connected to earth ground in end use. The converter units are not designed to be operated outside
of an enclosure which provides a means of mechanical, electrical, and fire protection.
S Coding pins
The converter are delivered with coding pins. The coding pin configurations as delivered must be
sustained.
S Protective Earthing
The Power Supply must be properly grounded to mains protective earthing termination at end use.
S Fusing
In case of failure, the Power Supply must be returned to a Thales Authorized Service Center. There
are no user-serviceable parts in the Power Supply.
3-20 Ed. 10.13

3.1.10.6 Installing the MAGS RF Antenna
Site Characteristics; Rx/Tx Antenna placement in an Airport Situation

S A mix of low height antennas and high antennas with clear view to runway & parking
S Avoid metal structures nearby (HF reflection, multipathing)
S Plan certain sites outside the airport (at least 10 to 50 km) for approach coverage (ideally with line
of sight to runway)
Site Characteristics; Rx/Tx Antenna placement in a Wide Area Coverage Situation (WAM)
S High positions with clear 360° view
S Power & land communication lines (avoid satellite communication when possible)
Example locations
S Telephone provider masts, radio provider
masts or NAVAIDS/Radar sites
S High buildings
S Water towers or lighthouses
S Hill & mountain tops
Fig. 3-19 RF Antenna fixation on a mast (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-21

General Considerations of Antenna Placement

S Free line of sight at 360°
S Antenna perpendicular to ground, aligned ±0.5°
S Mind the bend radius of coaxial cables (see fig. right)
S Protection from lightning strikes
S Grounding (16 mm2 minimum)
S Connection to a grounding point
S In cases of airports, line of sight to: runway, parking
area, Manoeuvring area
Examples of Antenna Placement
lightning arrestor
GPS antenna
boom
Rx/Tx antenna
Bottom picture
Well done in this project:
S free line of sight at 360°
S free line of sight to runway
and all other areas
3-22 Ed. 10.13

Examples of Antenna Placement (continued)
Ed. 10.13 3-23

Examples of Sector Antenna Installation
Cone of Silence Considerations

In a short distance coverage consideration, targets within the cone of silence will not be seen (or
through multipathing / HF reflection on nearby buildings which is an undesirable effect).
S MAGS antennas have a known cone of silence limiting coverage from above/under the antennas
S Impact on short range coverage when the antenna is placed on a high mast
Cone of silence
Cone of Cone of
silence silence
antenna
antenna
Fig. 3-20 Cone of Silence (examples)
3-24 Ed. 10.13

3.1.10.7 Rx(/Tx) Antenna Installation

In a GS-T configuration, always keep the safe operation of the TXB transmitter module in mind:
ATTENTION
Material damage of transmitter is possible. Do not switch on the TXB transmitter mo
dule before it is connected to the RX/TX antenna (or a dummy load) and make sure that
the connection to the antenna (or the dummy load) is good. Otherwise severe hardware
damage could occur.
Ground station sites must have available; required considerations:

S Power lines
S Communication lines back to the server room
S Grounding point available for equipment and antenna
S Bend radius of coaxial cables must be taken into account for cable pipes from antenna to ground
station
Lightning protectors,
grounding
Fig. 3-21 AX 680 Ground station installation and antenna installation (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-25

3.1.10.8 Important Measurements
SWR (Standing Wave Ratio)

S Check the cable quality. The ratio should be close as close as possible to 1 (values under 1.2 are
not too bad)
Cable delay
S Electrical cable delay of the cable (in ns), measured through S11 or S21
S Take into account cable type during measurement (see next slides)
WGS-84
S Calculate the position of the Ground Station
S Multiple methods are available; see next slides for further details
Antenna
S Measuring point should be the connector
S Precision should be in cm accuracy Reference point
S Either airport reference point
S Or independent WGS-84
position measurement
Fig. 3-22 To determine the position of the Ground Station (example)
3-26 Ed. 10.13

3.1.10.9 Coaxial Cable Connector

Trimming tools for coaxial cables ½” and ¼”
Use of trimming tools, heat gun, electric tape and knife
Two methods to cut coaxial cables are available:
S For the cable LCF12-50, use the trimming tool no. 04 BN 541317
S For the cable LCF14-50, use the trimming tool no. 04 BN 541320
24 mm 11 mm
(15/16”) (7/16”)
Max. flare
14.5 mm
(9/16”)
½” cable
(example: LCF12-50)
Only cut at top
position between
two valleys!
Gum Ring
Max. flare
7.8 mm
(5/16”)
¼” cable
(example: LCF14-50)
17 mm 8 mm
(11/16”) (5/16”)
Fig. 3-23 Cutting coaxial cables (size 1/2” and size 1/4”), examples
Ed. 10.13 3-27

Practical Example of SWR Measurement
S SWR at 1030 MHz and 1090 MHz (in case of 1090 ES technology)
S Electrical cable length
S In this example:
- LCF12-50 (1/2” cable) Deduced delay: 148.4848 ns

with 0.072 dB/m @ 1 GHz and propagation of 88 %
(from data sheet and given to the analyzer)
- SWR:
@ 1030 MHz: 1.07
@ 1090 MHz: 1.14
- Cable electrical length:

39.20 meter
vr (LCF12-50) = 88 %
c = speed of light
Fig. 3-24 Example calculation of Standing Wave Ratio (SWR)
S Antenna cables must be grounded
S Long cables (>50 m) must be grounded at regular intervals
S Equipment grounding must be done carefully
3.1.10.10 Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection
S Lightning protection using Lightning rods
S Over-voltage protection using Gas Discharge Tube lightning protectors (GDT)

90 V for GPS, Monitor
230 V for AX 680 SPU
600 V for AN 1030
900 V for NSTX
3-28 Ed. 10.13

Examples of Lightning/OVP-Protection Ground Cabling
Grounding line
(min. 16 mm2)
Cabinet grounding line
Fig. 3-25 Exchange panel in the indoor cabinet (example)
Lightning
over-voltage
protectors
(GDT-type)
Grounding line
Fig. 3-26 GDT installation (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-29

Lightning overvoltage
protectors (GDT-type)
Fig. 3-27 Lightning overvoltage protectors and grounding lines (example)
3-30 Ed. 10.13

3.1.10.11 Position Measurement
Position Measurement: reference point + bearing

S Reference point A (airport reference or independent measure)
S Direct distance measurement from A to S
S Distance d and angle from ground level alpha α°
S Direct bearing measurement from North theta θ° from A to S
Position Measurement: 2 reference points, no bearing

S Two reference point measurements A and B
S Two distances from ref. A and B to ground point of antenna (dA and dB)
S Extra information: antenna 'left or right' of A to B line
S Measurement of ground height h of antenna
h
Right of AB
da Left of AB
db A
Fig. 3-28 Methods of Position Measurement (examples)
Ed. 10.13 3-31

3.1.10.12 Minimum Requirements for Communication Lines
Communication lines
In all cases, prefer land communication lines over satellite communication (which have expensive
rental costs for low bandwidth availability)
S Single channel receive-only ground station: minimum 256 kbps

S Dual sector receive-only ground station: minimum 512 kbps
S Single channel transceiver ground station: minimum 320 kbps
S Dual sector transceiver ground station: minimum 640 kbps
Data traffic on the communication line depends on airspace traffic density.
General recommendation: when possible, use lines with 1 Mbps or higher.
S Maximum net delay: 200 ms

S Maximum jitter: 100 ms
S Configurable firewall rules (open network)
S UDP, TCP, SSH, SNMPv3, VPN tunnel transparent
S Redundant connection can be supported
S IPv4 multicast shall be handled
Fig. 3-29 WLAN communication antenna (examples)
3-32 Ed. 10.13

3.1.11 Placement Criteria and Installation of the GPS Antenna

If the GPS signal cannot be received very well, this will end up in bad synchronization quality. This
section shall help the installer team to find good site locations for the GPS antennas. Furtheron, there
are also practical hints about the mechanical and electrical mounting works.
S 360° horizontally free line of sight around the GPS antenna would be ideal. Minimum 270 °
S No obstructions 30° above the horizon, see Fig. 3-32
S Antenna placements underneath platforms or similar must be avoided
S Avoid shadowing, thus getting multipath effects, by tower structures, shelters, hangars or other
metallic objects nearby, see Fig. 3-34.
S Avoid possibility of RF signal reflections or multipathing by metallic objects nearby
S Avoid reflections by water-filled areas e.g. flat roofs, wetlands oder lakes which may reflect GPS
signals heavily, see Fig. 3-34. In particular the area surrounding the GPS antenna shall be pre
pared such that no water bodies can accumulate during rain season. Appropriate means such as
drainage can prevent dominant ground multipath reflections.
S Cable run should be as short as possible, because the losses at the GPS frequency are significant
S The antenna shall stand perpendicular to the ground, aligned within ±0.5°
S The specific distances, clearance areas and elevation angles should be established in a case-
by-case modelling to identify the best siting option that leads to minimum multipath errors and,
more important, to uncorrelated multipath errors at the GPS antennas. Signal measurements
should not be made only at one time of day, but rather the whole 24 hours of a day. Satellite constel
lation patterns are changing constantly over 24 hours.
3.1.11.1 Multipath Effects on GPS Signals
GPS satellites
direct
reflections
GPS antenna
terrain structures buildings e.g. hangars
Fig. 3-30 Possible sources of multipath (examples)
Ed. 10.13 3-33

Abbreviations:
RHCP = Right-Hand Circularly Polarized signal
LHCP = Left-Hand Circularly Polarized signal
θ= Satellite Elevation Angle (theta)
Direct signal
RHCP
θ
RHCP
GPS
antenna Ground bounce
LHCP multipath signal
θ (theta)
RHCP
or RHCP
LHCP
θ = satellite elevation angle
Fig. 3-31 Multipath bounce scenarios (examples)
When a circularly polarized signal is reflected off of a perfectly conducting reflector, it reverses its pola
rization sense (e.g. RHCP -> LHCP). Polarization sense continues to be reversed for each subse
quent bounce. Therefore, a right-hand circularly polarized signal that has bounced an odd number
of times will become a left-hand circularly polarized signal. Bouncing on surfaces attenuates the am
plitude.
Two types of multipath can corrupt a GPS measurement: ground bounce multipath and multipath sig
nals that are reflected off buildings or similar structures (structure bounce multipath). Typically,
ground bounce multipath occurs at relatively low satellite elevation angles.
Rated Radiation Coverage of the standard GPS Aerotech antenna according to technical data
sheet:
4.0 dBic theta = 0°
-1.0 dBic 0 < theta = 75°
-3.0 dBic theta = 90°
Because the magnitude of the ground's reflection coefficient increases as the satellite angle de
creases, it is assumed that the worst multipath interference occurs at the lowest satellite elevation
angles. In practice, satellites below 5 degrees of elevation are not typically used for aircraft navigation
because of the high likelihood they are corrupted by multipath.
3-34 Ed. 10.13

Clearance Hemisphere
clearance hemisphere
elevation angle
GPS antenna
clearance diameter
Fig. 3-32 Clearance hemisphere and GPS antenna obstacle clearance area
The 'clearance hemisphere' above the GPS antenna can be defined as a volume about the antenna
within which stationary objects have a high potential to cause unacceptable degradation of system
performance.
Objects located within this hemisphere can cause either blockage of the GPS satellite signals result
ing in the potential for the reference receiver to lose lock, or reflection/diffraction of the GPS satellite
signals resulting in an inability to generate sufficiently accurate range corrections.
Free line of sight to the hemisphere
GPS antenna
Fig. 3-33 GPS antenna location providing free line of sight to the hemisphere (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-35

Examples of Good GPS Antenna Positioning

The antenna should be located at the highest point e.g. on top of a building roof with free line of sight
to the hemisphere. Collocation should only be chosen if the highest point with free line of sight is avai
lable.
For example, the GPS antenna can be placed on top of a shelter using an extra mast with min.
1.5 m height above the shelter roof edge (if the shelter roof provides free line of sight). This kind of
installation has already proved to work pretty well in many cases.
min. 1.5 m height above shelter/roof provides free line

the shelter roof edge of sight to the hemisphere
min. 1.5 m
Not yet optimal, butter better: Offset the GPS antenna to the main building/mast structure using a
boom or antenna support (in German: Ausleger; en Français: bras de déport).
hinge boom (antenna support) GPS antenna
3-36 Ed. 10.13

Examples of what should be avoided

S Avoid neighborhood to radar stations. The GPS antenna should be installed with sufficient dis
tance to any radio broadcast antennas or other radiating sources.
S Avoid the following sources of electrical and magnetic noise / electrical interference:
- Gasoline engines (spark plugs)
- Televisions and PC monitors
- Alternators and generators
- Electric motors
- Equipment with DC-to-AC converters
- Fluorescent lights
- Switching power supplies
S Avoid to place the GPS antenna on the same location like the RX/TX antenna.
S Do not place the GPS antenna too near to metallic bars, masts etc.
The GPS antenna has perfectly

free line of sight to the hemisphere,
however with poor signal quality
due to the radar antenna nearby
RADAR
antenna
metallic parts
reflect or de
flect GPS sig
nals
too small distance

to metallic objects
Ed. 10.13 3-37

S Avoid shadowing, thus getting multipath effects, by tower structures, shelters, hangars or other
metallic objects nearby.
Avoid shadowing Avoid reflections by water-filled areas

by tower structures e.g. flat roofs, wetlands oder lakes which
may reflect GPS signals massively
Fig. 3-34 Examples of bad antenna locations: shadowing or multipath by water-filled areas
Final Check of the GPS Signal Quality
After antenna and bracket installation, it is strongly suggested to measure the Return Loss parameter
(S11) at the end of the RF cable which is inside the ground station room. This can be easily done by
means of a network analyzer and a suitable calibration kit. In this manner it is possible to check the
antenna installation and to identify preliminary issues.
To check and document the GPS reception and installation situation
S Take photos of the installed GPS antenna and its surroundings. If there are obstructions, document
their direction and distance from the antenna. A 360 ° panorama photo of the antenna environment
would be valuable.
S Document the mounting configuration and antenna height (drawing with directions of compass
and rough distances). Include obstacles in the immediate surrounding of the antenna.
S Check that the GPS antenna mounting tube is correctly earthed and check the GPS antenna
cables and connections by visual inspection.
S To check the quality of GPS signal reception, observe the received signal quality at least one day
long. The satellite constellations are changing continuously over 24 hours.
3-38 Ed. 10.13

3.1.12 GPS Antenna - Mechanical Mounting

Antenna Description
The GPS antenna plays an important role within the Thales MAGS system. The antenna is a 50 Ohm
compact patch, has a narrowband frequency span and an omnidirectional horizontal radiation dia
gram. Further details can be found in the GPS antenna specifications.
GPS antenna and

GPS antenna mounting kit
RF connector (TNC)
Gasket
GPS antenna adapter
mounting tube and

clamps (2x)
∅
990 mm 25 mm
mast clamp
screws
Fig. 3-35 Mast clamp and screws (examples)
Ed. 10.13 3-39

The GPS antenna is usually provided with a mounting kit, including:

S one ∅ 25 mm steel pole, one meter long with one threaded end
S two small wall-mounting type mast clamps
Mechanical and Electrical Installation

Each mast clamp can be secured to a vertical wall by means of the two provided screws. A metallic
folded plate on the opposite side of the wall will fasten the steel pole to the cradle. The shape of the
holes on this plate is done to ease as much as possible the installation and placing of the pole by
removing some minor installation errors. Each mast clamp will fasten the steel pole on one side, while
securing it to a wall on the other side. The two mast clamps are able to:
S match any pole from ∅ 20 mm to ∅ 60 mm (outer diameter)
S be installed to any wall at least 70 mm thick
The average inter-axis between the two wall screws is 133 mm. Only two clamps per pole are needed
and the installation side of each clamp should be like the one shown in Figure 3-35.
S Preferably use the associated mounting material if possible
S The antenna can be mounted to an optional mounting tube with thread, L= 990 mm, 25 mm ∅
S Mount the antenna in a vertical position and align within ±0.5°
Cable Connection (refer to Figs. 3-9 and following):

S Minimize the required cable length of the GPS antenna to the building; it shall not exceed 30 m
(i.e. attenuation 2.4 dB). Longer cables may be possible. In this case, a budget calculation is re
quired.
S RF cable characteristics shall be similar to Cellflex 1/4”, attenuation < 15 dB/100 m
S The RF antenna cable connector (TNC type) is inside the antenna adapter
S Check the correct fitting of the gasket between antenna and adapter
S The bend radius of the coaxial cables shall not be too small
S Install UV-resistant cable ties or mounting brackets for strain relief
Earthing and Protection from Lightning Strikes or Surge (Primary Protection)

S The antenna fastening base and mounting tube shall have conductive connection to the tower
(earth), preferably at the building entry, if applicable
S Use earth clamps every 2 m
S Earthing cable to building; the earthing cable shall be a cable with more than 16 mm2 ∅. It shall
be as short as possible and be connected to the earth of the shelter or building. Avoid loops.
Not allowed:
- Insulating material or paint must not be used
- No filters are allowed for cables to the GPS antenna output because because of DC blockage.
The GPS antenna is supplied with +5 V DC via the GPS RF cable.
- No quarter-wave lightning protectors are allowed (blockage of DC); only gas discharge tube
(GDT) protectors may be used
3-40 Ed. 10.13

3.1.12.1 Installing the Power and ETH Network Cables
! WARNING
High Voltage. Danger to life, risk of injury due to electric shock. Before connecting exter
nal power supply cables (DC or AC) to the equipment, verify that the external electrical
power supply is switched off.
The personnel must ensure that for the duration of the works the whole unit and the cabi
net are disconnected from the external electrical power supply and protected against un
authorized reconnection.
a) Running of the power cables between external mains via 'mains supply terminal box' and the GS
outdoor housing.
b) Running of the network cables between the GS outdoor housing towards the MAGS wide-area
communication network (WAN) via the Ethernet terminal box.
Cabling works
S All cables shall be as short as possible, loops have to be avoided
S All cables need to be cut for their required length.
Optionally, the cables can be tailored prior to the delivery to the site.
S Certain cable connectors need to be assembled and sealed during the installation on site
S System cabling diagrams: See Figs. 3-9 thru Fig. 3-16, if applicable
S All interfaces indicated as 'SELV circuit' (see section 1.3.6; technical data - interface descriptions)
have only operational insulation and must only connect to Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) as de
fined in IEC 60950. Connecting other than SELV circuits can create hazards.
3.1.12.2 Installing the Fiber-Optical Network Cables
NOTE: A detailed installation instruction can be found in the Annex A of this manual.
Required tooling for Ethernet cabling:

S Harting RJ45 Gigalink Assembly Tool (optional). Harting P/N 09 45 800 0500 to assemble Harting
RJ45 8-pole connectors to flexible cables.
ATTENTION
Danger of cable connector hardware damage. Never pull directly at the installed fiber-
optical cable!
Fiber-optical network cables have to be handled and installed with special care:
S Install all fiber-optical cables with a minimum bending radius of 40 mm
S Only use the provided connector plug for connection or disconnection of a cable
S All connectors must be carefully checked and - if necessary - cleaned before use
S The female sockets at the interface panel must always be closed with the protective plastic caps
in order to maintain IP 66 protection, if not used
Ed. 10.13 3-41

3.1.12.3 Installing and Cabling of the Outdoor Cabinet, Mounting Cover Sheet
The outdoor cabinet is internally installed and wired. The outdoor cabinet will be mounted with its ped
estal to rag bolts on a prepared foundation (customer defined). To mount the cabinet, the cover
sheets of the pedestal have to be removed. The cabinet's bottom cover sheets are attached to the
cabinet's pedestal frame with retaining clips. Only the front sheet is additionally fixed with two screws.
All four cover sheets may be removed if required e.g. for guiding the cables or before fixing the cabinet
to the concrete pedestal with screws. For easy mounting or dismounting, bottom cover sheets are
secured with retaining clips (Fig. 3-36), which fit to openings in the pedestal frame.
- For dismounting, first loosen the two screws of the front cover sheet (Fig. 3-36). Then push the
front bottom cover sheet to the left and withdraw. The other sheets are not secured with screws,
just push left for opening and withdraw.
- For mounting, position first the other sheets and push right to close. At last, position the front bot
tom cover sheet to the pedestal frame. Secure finally the front cover sheet with the screws.
dismounting and mounting cover sheets
retaining clip
cover sheet, rear
retaining clip,
securing screws
PUSH left PUSH right
to open to close mounting screws
cover sheet
cabinet front, pedestal foundation

bottom cover sheet cabinet pedestal frame, mounted to foundation
Fig. 3-36 Outdoor cabinet's pedestal frame, mounting bottom cover sheets (example)
The RF and communication cables as well as the mains connection are fed through the pedestal of
the outdoor cabinet to the exchange panel at the bottom of the cabinet.
3-42 Ed. 10.13

CAUTION
Before connecting mains, check that the mains supply line is dead.
- Connect the mains cable to the mains connection panel (see Fig. 3-37).
- Connect the RF cables and network communication cable to the correspondent input connectors
of the exchange panel at the bottom of the cabinet (see Fig. 3-37).
cabinet 24HU outdoor, bottom front cabinet 24HU outdoor, bottom rear
mains terminals RF and network communication line connection
Details of mains connection panel, outdoor cabinet
to UPS
PE N L
cover cover
mains N L N L N L N L PE
terminals
L PE N L PE N PE N L
Mains sockets Fuse Lightning and Fuse

breakers Overvoltage breakers
50 A Protectors 16 A
Outdoor cabinet
External mains 230 VAC

PE N L Provided by customer
incl. mains fuse, see NOTE below.
NOTE: The external mains connection has to be protected electrically according to national regulations regarding the mains fuse.
Fig. 3-37 Connecting RF, communication and mains cable (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-43

3.1.13 Installing the Optional Backup Batteries

This instruction describes the on-site installation of the outdoor battery backup system.
3.1.14 Battery Safety Label on the GS Cabinet
'Warning; Battery Hazard'
Protection against short circuits and other hazards of electrical current. Reasons for electrical hazards
caused by batteries can be high currents, which may flow in case of a fault condition or the voltage
at the battery poles, which can not be switched off.
Regard all safety notes and precautions which are described in technical standard EN 50727-2
(Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations).
Hazards caused by batteries may be:
- electrical currents
- penetrating gases
- electrolyte
3.1.15 Work Safety Precautions for Installation and Maintenance Works

- When performing installation and maintenance works, persons may work in the close surrounding
of the battery installation. Personal must have the necessary qualification and must be instructed
properly in the special procedures required.
- Batteries must not be connected or disconnected when under current conduction. Before, current
conduction has to be disconnected.
- Block batteries / Battery cells have a great weight. Take care to locate them safely on the site's
ground. Only use well suited vehicles to transport them.
3.1.16 Fastener Kit for Battery Installation

With each battery cell or monobloc, a complete fastener kit is supplied i.e. bolts or nuts, spring wash
ers and plain washers (see Fig. 3-38). Together with this installation hardware, an according separate
Installation Instruction Leaflet is supplied. The major issues of this installation leaflet have been inte
grated in the following descriptions and procedures.
Fig. 3-38 Fastener kit (example)
3-44 Ed. 10.13

3.1.17 Installing the Backup Batteries (Option)
1. Place the GS cabinet to the installation location. Pay attention that the back of the cabinet is in suffi
cient distance to the building wall behind it in order that it remains reachable by the user or mainte
nance personnel.
NOTE: After installation of the batteries, the mains supply cable in the rear of the cabinet can
not be reached from the front side any more!
2. Install the batteries in the cabinet. Battery connection works are easier if you put the connections
to the back.
3. Remove the insulating terminal cover(s).
4. Place the battery cells in position in the cabinet at their correct 'cell centers' see Fig. 3-41.
5. Connect the battery cells: When all battery cells have been placed in the cabinet, interconnect
them by means of the plastic connecting straps and fastener kit, in the sequence: terminal, con
necting strap, plain washer, spring washer and bolt or nut.
Never use a metal wire or other metal object for this purpose; instead of plastic connecting straps.
6. Apply a thin film of contact grease on the copper track connections before tightening the screws.
7. Tighten the fastener set bolt(s) or nut(s) to the fastener torque level indicated on the product label.
Never use a standard spanner! A single, solid sleeved copper strap connector is used to connect
cells on the same tier of the same shelf of the cabinet. A single flexible insulated cable connector
is used for inter-tier (or inter-shelf) connection.
1 Fastener kit M8
2 Fastener kit M6
3 Inter-unit connector
4 Inter-tier connector
5 Insulating terminal cover
Fig. 3-39 Battery cell connection (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-45

1 Fastener kit M8
2 Fastener kit M6
3 Inter-unit connector
4 Inter-tier connector
5 Insulating terminal cover
Fig. 3-40 Re-installation of the battery insulating terminal cover
8. Re-install the insulating terminal cover. Insulating terminal covers have been designed to be
fitted on completion of the connecting up sequence of the battery. To fit them back on, it may be
necessary to remove the side of the cover by simply snapping it off.
9. Connect the red cable with the positive pole and the blue cables with the battery's negative pole
(see Fig. 3-41).
10. Connect the temperature sensor with the positive pole of the 2nd battery from the left (as seen
from the cabinet front, see Fig. 3-41). The temperature sensor is safeguarded while transport
with a cable fastener, also on the left cabinet side.
Temperature
sensor
Battery - Battery +
copper tracks
(inter-unit connectors)
Fig. 3-41 Cabinet rear, rear cover is removed (example)
3-46 Ed. 10.13

11. Install the tubes of the battery cabinet ventilation to the battery gas outlets of each battery, see
Figs. 3-42 and 3-43. The safety topics of the ventilation system are described in section 1.4.11.
12. Connect the red cable with the positive pole of the respective battery set at the upper or lower
level.
13. Connect the blue cable with the negative pole of the respective battery set at the upper or lower
level.
battery ventilation outlets
Fig. 3-42 Battery cabinet ventilation outlets (example)
GS cabinet
Outdoor version
gas ventilation
tube system
tube
Batteries system
gland
gas exhaust
Fig. 3-43 Battery gas ventilation system, GS outdoor version (example)
Ed. 10.13 3-47

14. Connect the temperature sensor with the positive pole of the 2nd battery from the left (as seen
from the cabinet front, see Fig. 3-44). The temperature sensor is safeguarded while transport
with a cable fastener, also on the left cabinet side.
battery - temperature sensor battery +
Fig. 3-44 Assembly of the temperature sensor (example)
3-48 Ed. 10.13

3.1.17.1 Check of Ground Station Installation
Installation site:
Mounting date:
Assembly technicians:
Mounted set-up: GS-R ___
GS-T ___
Direct wall mounting ___
Amount Serial Number(s)

Modules:
RXB _____
TXB _____
BTB (for RXB) ___
BTB (for TXB) ___
Measured ground resistance: ______ Ohm
Examination YES NO Comments

All screws are tightened up sufficiently
Outdoor cabling is done approximate to buildings
(if possible)
Cabling of system devices has been done according
to regulations
Cables are not cracked
All cable connections have been made properly
All RF connections have been established
All Power connections are established and
are in a good condition
Overvoltage/Lightning protection is established
Earthing has been done according to regulations
Maximum loads have been considered
Minimum distances are maintained
Protective caps of module boxes are inserted into all
open interface connections
On TSD of LCMS, there is delivery of ADS-B targets

Localization of GPS antenna is given in the PTM fea
ture. Perform the GPS self survey application, if no
localization is shown in the tab 'PTM monitoring'
The Ground Station Manager shows the correct IP IP address:
address of the GS.
Ed. 10.13 3-49

Ping test from the ground station to the MAGS servers

gives positive results.
The Ground Station Manager shows the correct syn
chronization of the GS.
In the Ground Station Manager in 'PTM monitoring',
no error message about the synchronization pops up.
If it is a GS-T: Transmitter monitoring is green.
Date:
Location:
Signature:
3.1.17.2 Final Installation Check
A complete site verification test procedure and a related installation report form is given in section 3.7.
Before the ground station is switched to operation, check all installation items:
- cabling of equipment and earthing connections
- tight cable fitting, no cable bends and tight fitting of outdoor equipment
- power supply connections
To check the GPS DC supply at ground station equipment

1. To check the value of the supply voltages for the GPS antenna preamplifier, switch on the SPU by
setting the AC power switch on back panel to “I”.
2. Check the supply voltage for the GPS antenna at the RF cable on the antenna output and register
it in the installation report form in section 3.7. Do not short circuit the dc voltage with the probes.
The value has to be between 4.0 and 5.5 V.
NOTE: If there is a short circuit or fault in the antenna dc supply, the PTM breaks the dc supply to the antenna. This state is latched.
To activate the dc supply again after correction, switch off and on the SPU, or withdraw and insert again the PTM board.
3. Finally switch off the AX 680 SPU and fix and seal the cables at the antennas.
NOTE: If the optional external Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU) in the RX path is used and shall be
DC supplied, the availability of its supply voltage has also to be checked. For this purpose,
check that the DC supply jumper X13 on the AX680/SPB3 board is set (default: open).
The jumper location is shown in section 4.4.11. Check the supply voltage for the AAU/LNA
at the RF cable on the LNA RFout connector and register it in the installation report form
in section 3.7. The value has to be between 11.2 and 12.2 V.
A site verification test procedure and a related installation report form is provided in section 3.7.
3-50 Ed. 10.13

3.2 SWITCHING ON THE GROUND STATION ON SITE

3.2.1 Status of Installation
Before operation, the system must be completely installed as follows:
- MAGS ground station (GS-R, GS-T (C or I), installed as per section 3.1
- Power supply, installed
- Antennas installed and cabling complete
- Network connected
- Mains AC voltage or, if DC version, DC voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage
range.
3.2.2 Status of the System

- Local mains supply off and local DC supply, if DC/DC version used, off.
- GS-R: AC/DC version: mains switch at SPU backpanel to off (”0”). With DC version only: external
DC supply is off.
- GS-T (C or I): AC/DC version: mains switch at SPU backpanel to off (”0”). With DC version only:
external DC supply is off. Mains switch at backpanel of TXU to off (”0”).
- The Ground Station is normally configured and preset for operation in the factory before delivery.
This means that normally no basic software installations have to be performed.
3.2.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), Startup and Operation

NOTE: Perform this section, if the MAGS system uses or is equipped with an UPS equipment.
Observe also the information and the safety instructions of the original manufacturer user
manual of the Xanto UPS equipment.
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock. Even after the unit is disconnected from the mains power supply
(building wiring socket outlet), components inside the UPS system are still connected to
the battery and are still electrically live and dangerous.
Before carrying out any kind of servicing and/or maintenance, disconnect the batteries
and verify that no current is present. Only persons adequately familiar with batteries and
with the required precautionary measures may exchange batteries and supervise opera
tions. Unauthorized persons must be kept well away from the batteries.
Handling the UPS subassemblies, Observe the weight of the devices and battery packs.
- Switch on local mains AC supply.

As soon as the UPS is connected to mains supply, the UPS outlet sockets are powered. This is
indicated by the LED LINE and BYPASS. Fully charge the batteries of the UPS system by leaving
it connected to the mains for approx. 1 to 2 hours. The UPS system can also be used directly with
out charging, but the stored energy time may then be shorter than the nominal value specified.
- Press the button 'ON' on the front panel to start the UPS system.
Load capacity LEDs first light up simultaneously, then one after the other. After a few seconds the
Inverter LED lights up and the Bypass LED turns off. The UPS is now functioning normally.
Ed. 10.13 3-51

3.2.3.1 Configuration of SNMP-Card 'DW5SNMP30' (CS121)
To readout the UPS within a LAN /WAN, it is necessary to build in and configure the SNMP-Card
'DW5SNMP30'. Section 4.2.11 describes in detail the configuration of the SNMP-Card of the UPS
Xanto RT1000, RT2000 or RT3000 (if available). Refer also to section 4.2.10.4 e). After configuration,
it is able to communicate with a computer (RCMS or LCMS) via LAN/WAN with the UPS.
3.2.4 Switching On the Ground Station
CAUTION
The ground station must not be switched on if the antenna or antenna cabling is not prop
erly connected. If the transmitter AN1030 or NSTX is transmitting at full duty cycle, it may
be damaged if the antenna is disconnected.
1. Set AC switch at backpanel of AX 680 SPU to on 'I' (or switch on local external DC supply if DC/DC
version used). For GS-T (C or I): Set also AC switch at backpanel of TXU to on ”I”.
2. The system starts. The initialisation procedure takes some time (boot time about 60 s) while LED
'Fail' at SPB3 front of the SPU is lit, others are on or slowly flashing. Finally all LED of the SPB3
are lit to perform a lamp test, before the system is ready for operation. No fault indication should
be noted after the system has started.
3. To perform initial Ground Station settings, see section 3.2.5. Connect the LCMS Laptop to the se
rial interface (MicroSubD connector at the front of the SPU/SPB3) of the Ground Station using the
suitable interface cable (null modem cable). If the LCMS Laptop used does not include a serial
interface connector but an USB port, a special conversion cable (USB to Serial) has to be used.
This cable is optionally available.
4. To configure the SPB3 board, see section 3.2.6 and Part 2 'MAGS System SW', chapter 7.
5. To connect the Ground Station to the MAGS network, see section 3.2.7 and Part 2 'MAGS System
SW', chapter 7.
The basic preparation of the RCMS/LCMS and the installation of the operating system and the appli
cation software with the user roles is described in Part 2 'MAGS System SW'.
After the setup, a site verification test procedure should be performed. A related installation report
form is given in section 3.7.
3-52 Ed. 10.13

3.2.5 Initial Ground Station Settings

After the setup of the ground station i.e. in the normal operation phase, the GS Manager software
application manages the setting of GS parameters. The user can perform this either locally on the
LCMS or remotely via the RCMS. Before, all network parameters must be set correctly. The according
setting procedure is described below. Use the LCMS via the serial interface to perform the initial set
ting of the GS network parameters.
To perform the initial setting of the GS network parameters
1. Switch off the ground station.
2. Connect the LCMS to the maintenance interface 'MAINT' connector of the RXB or TXB using the
console cable; P/N 24039 28666.
3. Switch on the LCMS and the ground station.
4. After booting, login as ”supervisor”, enter the password ”12super21” and hit the keyboard key
'Enter'.
5. Open a terminal, set the mouse pointer in it and click the left mouse button.
6. Enter the command ”minicom” and hit 'Enter'.

Now you are connected to the ground station.
The ground station prompt ’gs login:’ is displayed.
7. Enter ”supervisor””, hit 'Enter', enter the password ”12super21” and hit 'Enter.'
Now, the ground station command line terminal is displayed.
8. Set or check the initial settings of the network parameters (with customer-defined values) by
entering the following commands.
Refer to Part 2, chapter 3 'Access to ground station Parameters'
/etc/network & 'Enter' edits the parameters
/sbin/ifconfig eth0 192.168.23.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 sets IP addresses, netmasks

/sbin/route add -net 0.0.0.0 gw 192.168.25.254 netmask 0.0.0.0 eth1 & 'Enter'
adds the new default route
vi /etc/network & 'Enter' edits parameters
netconfig & 'Enter' confirms the settings and uses

them for network configuration
gs reload & 'Enter' transfers the parameter values to

the GS main application
After the initial setting, the GS is accessible by the LCMS via the MAINT Ethernet interface. All other
settings can be then be done using the GS Manager on the LCMS. When the LCMS is connected
locally to the ground station, the GS parameters are available for the supervisor only.
Ed. 10.13 3-53

3.2.5.1 Use of LCMS USB Port for Serial Connection
If no serial port is available at the LCMS laptop for serial connection to the Ground Station (SPU/
SBP3), an USB connector with the USB adapter cable 24028 28007 (USB to serial) has to be used.
To establish this connection, perform the following procedure
1. Open a terminal on the desktop and log in as user 'root'. Enter the command:
nedit /etc/minirc.dfl
2. The user is now able to perform modifications within the minirc.dfl file.
3. Delete the comment character ('#') in front of the line: #pr port /dev/ttyUSB0
and enter the comment character ('#') in front of the line: #pr port /dev/ttyS0 .
4. Save the new setting and close the window.
3.2.6 Preparing the SPB3 Serial Connection
The configuration of a new Ground Station is mainly done through the configuration of the SPB3 bo
ard of the SPU. This configuration procedure shall be performed before connecting the GS to the
MAGS network. A serial RS232 connection from the SPU to the LCMS has to be used.
The configuration procedure is described in Technical Manual Part 2 (MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX
680), chapter 7.
3.2.7 Connection of the GS to the MAGS Network
To establish the connection of the Ground station to the MAGS network

(the detailed configuration procedures are described in Part 2 'MAGS System SW', chapter 7)
1. Setting the SPB3 network parameters:
See section 'SPB3 Network Setup' in the MAGS Software Manual.
2. Connection of the SPB3 using the NET1 connector to the MAGS environment:
See section 'Connection to the MAGS network' in the MAGS Software Manual.
3. 'Software Version Verification':

Refer to the section with the same name in Technical Manual Part 2 (MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX
680).
3-54 Ed. 10.13

3.3 STARTING THE CENTRAL PROCESSING STATION (CPS)

3.3.1 Status of the Installation
The Central Processing Station (CPS) hardware is normally installed in the ATC room or appropriate,
nearby the Control and Monitoring System (CMS) hardware. Before operation, the system must be
completely installed as follows:
- MAGS Ground Stations (GS-R, GS-T (C or I), installed
- RCMS components, installed
- Server CPS 1 and CPS 2, installed in the ATC room or appropriate location
- Server CMS-S 1 and CMS-S 2, installed in the ATC room or appropriate location
- Network connected
- Mains AC voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage range
The CPS is connected to the dedicated dual MLAT LAN using its dual 1000BaseT Ethernet network
interface card (NIC) and to the customer used dual LAN on the other side (logically).
3.3.2 Status of the CPS
NOTE: The CPS 1 and CPS 2 are normally configured and preset for operation in the factory be
fore delivery. This means that no basic software installations have to be performed.
- Local mains supply off
- CPS unit 1 and 2 are switched off (”0”)
3.3.3 Switch on the CPS
NOTE: As default, the server CPS 1 and 2 operate in Master/Slave configuration. The CPS1 is
seen as master, while the CPS2 is seen as slave.
1. Switch local mains supply on.
2. Start server CPS 1 with power switch at the front of the unit. The dual state power LED lights and
the system initializes the operating system and pre-configured applications. Finally the ”opera
tional” state will be indicated at the RCMS screen.
3. Start server CPS 2 with power switch at the front of the unit. The dual state power LED lights and
the system initializes the operating system and pre-configured applications. Finally the ”opera
tional” state will be indicated at the RCMS screen.
In the standard application, an own monitor or keyboard/mouse is not connected to the CPS units.
Further operation or configuration (if need be) is performed via the RCMS. However, for certain main
tenance procedures, the connection of a monitor and a keyboard/mouse to the CPS may be required
and useful, e.g. software reload in case of a hard disk replacement.
NOTE: Further operation, e.g. handling of software applications, is described in the Technical
Manual 'MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX 680' (Part 2).
Ed. 10.13 3-55

3-56 Ed. 10.13

3.4 STARTING THE CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (CMS)

3.4.1 Status of the Installation
The Control and Monitoring System Server hardware (CMS-S) is normally installed in the ATC room
or appropriate, nearby the Central Processing Station (CPS) hardware. Before operation, the system
must be completely installed as follows:
- MAGS Ground Stations (GS-R and GS-T installed)
- RCMS components, installed
- Server CPS 1 and CPS 2, installed in the ATC room or appropriate location
- Server CMS-S 1 and CMS-S 2, installed in the ATC room or appropriate location
- Network connected
- Mains AC voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage range
The CMS-S is connected via Ethernet to the different ground stations, the CPS server and via the
dual MLAT LAN to the RCMS.
In the standard application, a monitor and keyboard/mouse is connected to the CMS units each.
3.4.2 Status of the CMS-S

- Local mains supply off.
- CMS-S unit is switched off (”0”).
- CMS-S local TFT-monitor device, if available, is switched off (”0”).
NOTE: CMS-S1 and CMS-S2 are normally configured and preset for operation in the factory
before delivery. This means that no basic software installations have to be performed.
3.4.3 Switch on the CMS
NOTE: As default, the servers CMS-S1 and CMS-S2 operate in Master/Slave configuration.
The CMS-S1 is seen as master, while CMS-S2 is seen as slave.
1. Switch local mains supply on.

2. Switch CMS local TFT-monitor device, if available, on (”I”).
3. Start server CMS-S1 with power switch at the front of the unit. The dual state power LED lights
and the system initializes the operating system and pre-configured applications. Finally the ”op
erational” state will be indicated at the CMS-S monitor screen.
4. Start server CMS-S2 with the power switch at the front of the unit. The dual state power LED lights
and the system initializes the operating system and pre-configured applications. Finally the ”op
erational” state will be indicated at the CMS-S monitor screen.
NOTE: Further operation, e.g. handling of software applications, is described in Technical Ma
nual Part 2 (MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX 680).
Ed. 10.13 3-57

3.5 STARTING THE RCMS AT REMOTE SITE
NOTE: It is supposed that the Linux operating system and the application software is already in
stalled on the RCMS, i.e. ready for operation. Otherwise the installation procedures as
described in Part 2 'MAGS System SW', ref. no. 83140 56324, are required before.
For detailed information to the RCMS software structure, refer to the Technical Manual Part 2 (MLAT/
ADS-B Software AX/BX 680).
Starting the RCMS requires the following steps:
- Switch on the RCMS. Wait until the operating system is loaded (this takes a few seconds...)
- The operating system will be booted into the login screen.
- Login as 'supervisor' or 'monitor' (user account) to the Xfce desktop. A password is required: enter
the default password ”12super21” or ”12mon21” and hit the keyboard key 'Enter'.
- At the bottom of screen 0 the desktop panel provides the several icons to start up the RCMS
applications (see Fig. 3-45).
The user is now able to start up the various applications by clicking on the corresponding menu icons,
e.g. click on the MTSC icon to start up the MTSC application.
The MTSC application is always started for monitor user mode, independent from login.
On screen 1 the MTSC main window appears, containing the title bar with the current user role and
the name of the RCMS machine.
The monitor user is now able to get the current status of the MAGS system and detailed information
on the equipment in the the MTSC main window and the equipment manager windows.
A supervisor has the additional rights to change the configuration of the system and the equipment.
MTSC
Fig. 3-45 Desktop panel on RCMS to start up the MTCS application (example)
3-58 Ed. 10.13

3.6 HARDWARE-BASED GS OPERATION

3.6.1 Basic Concept of Ground Station Operation by Hardware / Software
The 'Hardware-based operation' of the Ground Station starts after the successful completion of
the final installation check, see section 3.7.
The range of hardware-based operation comprises the following:
- setting of a defined status of the system hardware and applying mains power to the ground station.
- switching on the SPU subsystem
- switching on the UPS subsystem
- switching on the other optional subsystems, if any
- setting of the network parameters in order to make the GS accessible via the IP-based network
- setup of environmental sensors, if any
- switching on the RCMS at remote site
- and later switching off the respective subsystems after operation
To verify that the remote site's hardware has been successfully installed and commissioned, the site
verification test procedure in section 3.7 is suggested.
After that, the remote GS operation will be continued only by software means. The software-based
operation of the ground station is described in the Technical Manual Part 2 'MLAT/ADS-B Software
AX/BX 680'.
The ADS-B Ground Station is normally configured and preset for operation in the factory before deliv
ery. This means that normally no basic software installation works have to be performed.
3.6.2 Status of GS Installation
Before operation, the system must be completely installed as follows:
- ADS-B ground station installed as per section 3.1

- Power supply installed
- Antennas installed and cabling complete
- Network connected
- Mains AC voltage or, if DC version, DC voltage must be in accordance with assigned input voltage
range.
3.6.3 Status of Power Supply
- AC/DC version: local AC mains supply is off

DC/DC version (option): local DC supply is off
- AC/DC version: mains switch at the AX 680 SPU backpanel is set to off ('0')
DC/DC version (option): external DC supply to the AX 680 SPU backpanel is off
Ed. 10.13 3-59

Hardware ADS-B AX 680 MAGS
3.6.4 UPS Xanto RT1000 or RT2000 (Option), Startup and Operation
Perform this section, if the ADS-B system is equipped with an optional UPS equipment.
Observe also the information and the safety instructions of the COTS user manual [2] of the Xanto
UPS RT-series equipment.
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock even after the unit is disconnected from the mains power supply
(building wiring socket outlet), components inside the UPS system are still connected to
the battery and are still electrically live and dangerous.
Before carrying out any kind of servicing and/or maintenance, disconnect the batteries
and verify that no current is present. Only persons adequately familiar with batteries and
with the required precautionary measures may exchange batteries and supervise opera
tions. Unauthorized persons must be kept well away from the batteries.
Handling the UPS subassemblies, observe the weight of the devices and battery packs.
1. Switch on local mains AC supply.
As soon as the UPS is connected to mains supply, the UPS outlet sockets are now powered. This
is indicated by the LED LINE and BYPASS. Fully charge the batteries of the UPS system by leaving
the UPS system connected to the mains for approx. 1 to 2 hours. The UPS system can also be
used directly without charging, but the stored energy time may then be shorter than the nominal
value specified.
2. Press the button 'ON' on the front panel to start the UPS system.
Load capacity LEDs first light up simultaneously, then one after the other. After a few seconds the
Inverter LED lights up and the Bypass LED turns off. The UPS is now functioning normally.
3-60 Ed. 10.13

3.6.5 UPS Xanto XS 1000R (Option), Startup and Operation
Fig. 3-46 UPS XS 1000R (option) display description

3.6.5.1 Starting the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R
1. Check whether the power cable of the UPS system is plugged in.
2. If you haven't done so already, switch on the mains power supply for the circuit that the UPS system
is connected to. The display on the front side of the UPS system lights up and shows the status
'UPS initializing'.
3. Make sure that the UPS system switches to standby mode ('UPS on standby').
4. Press the button on the UPS system for at least one second. The status indication on the display
switches to 'UPS starting'.
5. Check the display for active warning messages or information. Rectify any active warning mes
sages before you proceed (see Troubleshooting). If the display lights up, only proceed after all war
ning messages have been rectified. Check the status of the UPS system on the display and ob
serve any active warning messages. Rectify the warning messages and restart the UPS system,
if necessary.
6. Ensure that the display lights up continuously. This will show that the UPS system is running in
normal mode and that any loads are being provided with power. The UPS system should be in
normal mode.
7. Press the esc button until the start screen is displayed.
NOTE: In case a display warning about L/N phase assignment pops during start-up, check the
correct wiring of the L- or N line phase.
Ed. 10.13 3-61

Hardware ADS-B AX 680 MAGS
3.6.5.2 Starting the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R in Battery Mode

NOTE: Before using this function, the UPS system must have been supplied by the mains and
activated at least one time. The starting in battery mode can be disabled (see 'Starting
in battery mode' under User Settings)
1. Press the button on the UPS system until the display lights up and the status 'UPS starting' is dis
played. The UPS system runs through a self test from standby mode to battery mode. The display
lights up continuously. The UPS system supplied the system with power.
2. Check the display of the UPS system for active warning messages or information about missing
mains power. Rectify any active warning messages before you proceed (see Troubleshooting).
The 'UPS on Battery' information can be ignored in this case.
Check the status of the UPS system with the help of the information shown in the display and ob
serve any active warning messages. Rectify the warning messages and restart the device, if neces
sary.
3.6.5.3 Shutting Down the UPS System Xanto XS 1000R

1. Press the button on the UPS system for three seconds. The UPS system begins to output an audio
signal and shows the 'UPS off pending...' status. The UPS system then switches to standby mode
and the display switches off.
NOTE: If the button is released after less than three seconds, the UPS system will return to its
previous operating mode.
2. Switch on the mains power supply for the circuit that the UPS system is connected to.
3.6.6 19” Indoor Cabinets, Setup of Environmental Sensors

The indoor 19” cabinet types feature ventilation and ventilated heating. The appropriate built in fan
devices and heating devices are controlled by temperature sensors within the cabinet. For the 19”
wall mounted cabinet 10HU, the environmental sensors are located at the C-bar in the rear compart
ment. The heating device with fan is mounted to the left side of the rear compartment, the ventilation
fan is mounted to the right side of the front compartment. For the 19” cabinet 24HU, the environmental
sensors are located in the cabinet top and bottom at the rear inside. The heating device with fan is
mounted to the bottom of the cabinet, the ventilation fans are mounted to the top cover.
Adjusting the temperature controls
- Temp 1: start/stop ventilation: set temperature control to e.g. 40 °C, fan starts >40 °C.
- Temp 2: start/stop heating: set temperature control to e.g. 15 °C, heater starts <15 °C.
Temp. controller lower limit Temp. controller upper limit

(heater control) (fan control)
red blue
NOTE: standard setting is 10 °C. NOTE: standard setting is 30 °C.

Fig. 3-47 Setting temperature controller in 19” indoor cabinets
3-62 Ed. 10.13

3.7 SITE VERIFICATION TEST PROCEDURE AND INSTALLATION REPORT

This section suggests tests and procedures which the installation team can perform in order to verify
that a remote site has been properly installed and commissioned. The result is laid down in a Site
Installation Report (SIR). An appropriate form is found in section 3.7.7.
3.7.1 Serial Numbers

Record all serial numbers into the Site Installation Report (SIR).
3.7.2 Mechanical Setup of Equipment

3.7.2.1 ADS-B RX Antenna
1. Verify that the ADS-B RX antenna is mounted vertical within ±0.5°.

2. Note the installed antenna height above ground to the SIR.
3. Take photos of the installed ADS-B RX antenna and its surroundings. If there are obstructions,
document their direction and distance from the antenna. A 360° panorama photo of the antenna
environment would be extremely valuable. Tick the check box for ADS-B RX antenna photos on
the SIR.
4. Document the mounting configuration and antenna height (drawing with directions of compass
and rough distances). Include obstacles in the immediate surrounding of the antenna.
5. Verify that the antenna has conductive connection to the mounting assembly (i.e. no paint at the
contact surface). Check that the mounting assembly is correctly connected to the protective earth
bus bar.
3.7.2.2 Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU), Option
1. Check that the AAU is mounted close to the ADS-B RX antenna so that the cable length between
antenna and AAU is less than 2 m.
2. Verify that the AAU protective earth strap is attached and correctly connected to the protective
earth bus bar.
3. Verify that the RF cables are correctly connected to the AAU:
- input (with quarter-wave lightning protector) connected to the ADS-B RX antenna,
- output connected to the AX 680 SPU.
3.7.2.3 Cables
1. Make sure that all cables are properly mounted according to the cable plan. Verify they are as short
as possible (no unnecessary loops).
2. Verify that the correct lightning protection is in place at the shelter cable entrance (for optional GPS
RX it must be a DC-pass type).
3. Verify that the earthing of all cables is done according to standard.
4. Make sure all RF cables (the arriving low-loss cables from the RX antenna or the GPS antenna)
are properly connected and not twisted or sharply bent.
Ed. 10.13 3-63

3.7.3 Electrical Connection of AX 680 SPU, AAU and active GPS RX Antenna
1. Make sure the AX 680 ground station is properly connected to nom. 240 VAC mains power supply
and that a protective earth strap is applied to the protective earth bus bar.
2. DC supply AAU option: Verify that jumper X13 on the SPU/SPB3 is set (if AAU is used) or removed.
Note: The DC supply disabled if no AAU is used.
If the AX 680 SPU is powered (i.e. switched on) and if an AAU is used, measure the voltage
arriving at the AAU output. Disconnect the cable from the AAU and measure the voltage between
the cable's center conductor and shielding. The measured voltage must be between 11.2 VDC
and 12.2 VDC. Document the measured voltage in the SIR.
3. DC supply of the GPS option: Verify that jumper J10 on the SPU/PTM is set to the required DC
voltage of 5 V: J10/5-6 must be 'set'.
If the AX 680 SPU is powered (i.e. switched on) measure the voltage arriving at the active
GPS antenna cable output. Disconnect the cable from the antenna and measure the voltage
between the cable's centre conductor and shielding. Do not short-circuit the voltage with the
probes. The measured voltage must be between 4.0 and 5.5 VDC. Document the measured
voltage in the SIR.
NOTE: If there is a short circuit or fault in the antenna dc supply, the PTM breaks the DC supply to the antenna. This state is latched.
To activate the DC supply again after correction, switch off and on SPU, or withdraw and insert again the PTM board.
3.7.4 RF Properties of Antenna Cables and Receiver adjustment

Measure the cable insertion loss at 1090 MHz of following cables. Document the result within the SIR:
1. ADS-B RX antenna to AAU, from AAU to shelter/building entry.

2. Shelter/building entry to exchange panel (if available) resp. input of AX 680 or the 19” cabinet.
3. Shelter/building entry to exchange panel (if available) resp. input of AX 680 or the 19” cabinet.
3.7.5 Check if Ground Station is Operational

Prerequisites: GPS antenna (option) and RX/TX antenna must be properly installed.
1. Connect the Ethernet crossover cable to ground station auxiliary port MAINT located at the
RXB/TXB connector and interface panel.
2. Connect the other cable end to the LCMS Ethernet port.
3. Power up the ground station.
4. Verify that all failure LEDs are off after the Ground Station boot up sequence.
5. Start the GS Manager on the LCMS desktop.
6. On GS Manager, select the SPB3 parameter page 'System'.
7. Check, if the SNMP communication status shown on the right side of the status bar (at the bottom
of the window) shows 'ok'.
8. Select the SPB3 parameter page 'Monitoring'.
9. Verify that all status indicators are 'green'.
3-64 Ed. 10.13

NOTE: - Yellow status indicator of 'LCMS Connection' is also good, because 'yellow' means
'Maintenance' activity, what is true in this case.
- Yellow status indicator of 'Time synchronisation' is also good, because it takes some
time until all required satellite signals have been picked up.
Until this final state is reached with green indication, yellow is indicated.
10. Verify that the correct SW (kernel, application) and the correct firmware are installed.
11. Select the SPB3 parameter page 'Network'.
12. Verify the correct network configuration of the interfaces (primary, maintenance and auxiliary) and
the routing table (net address, net mask and auxiliary).
13. Select the PTM parameter page 'Monitoring'.
14. Verify that the number of satellites is at least so high, which is required for useful operation.
15. Verify that the location parameters of the GPS antenna (latitude, longitude, altitude) is properly
known to the system. Please note that the location parameters of the GPS antenna may be slightly
different relative to the other GS location parameters, because the location may be different.
Document both the measured lat/lon and the configured lat/lon in the SIR.
16. Select the SPB3 parameter page 'System'.
17. Verify that the location parameters of the GS (latitude, longitude, altitude) is properly
known to the system. Document both the measured lat/lon and the configured lat/lon in the SIR.
18. Select the SPB3 parameter page 'ADS-B'. Number of Targets' must be greater than zero (this
works if an ADS-B equipped aircraft is in the receiver range). -> antenna can receive RF traffic.
19. Close the GS manager.
20. Logout and switch off the LCMS.
3.7.6 Network Connection to RCMS
Call the TSS (= responsible Technical System Supervisor) operating the RCMS, ask him to ping the
ground station in order to check that the GS is reachable via network.
3.7.7 Site Installation Report (SIR)
If all the above mentioned tests were successful, the ground station installation should be accepted.
The following form is an example to be used as a report for the site verification test.
Ed. 10.13 3-65

3-66 Ed. 10.13

3.8 SITE INSTALLATION REPORT (SIR)
SITE Site Name Callsign
Rack/housing Ref. No.:* Serial No.:*
Ground Station 1 Ref. No.: Serial No.:
Ground Station 2 Ref. No.:* Serial No.:*
1. Basic Parameter
On MCS Ground Station 1 Ground Station 2 (if available)
Callsign
SIC
IP Address
Latitude
Longitude
SPU S/N
UPS basic S/N*
UPS bat.p. S/N*
2. ADS-B RX Antenna
ADS-B RX ADS-B RX Antenna 1 ADS-B RX Antenna 2 (if available)
Type
S/N
VSWR
Height
Additionally j Sketch of Configuration j Sketch of Configuration
available
j Installation Photo j Installation Photo
j 360° Panorama j 360° Panorama
3. Antenna Amplifier Unit (AAU)

AAU* AAU 1 AAU 2 (if available)
AAU S/N
DC Voltage
4. GPS RX Antenna
GPS* GPS RX Antenna 1 GPS RX Antenna 2 (if available)
S/N
Height
Additionally j Sketch of Configuration j Sketch of Configuration
available
j Installation Photo j Installation Photo
j 360° Panorama j 360° Panorama
DC Voltage
* if available Page 1 of 2
Ed. 10.13 3-67

5. RF Cables
RF cabling Ground Station 1 Ground Station 2 (if available)
ADS-B RX antenna
Cable laying Insertion Loss VSWR Insertion Loss VSWR
RX ant. – AAU* input
AAU* – shelter input
shelter – rack input
ADS-B RX antenna, Test Transmission input**

TX ant. – shelter input
shelter – rack input
GPS antenna
GPS ant. –shelter inp.
shelter - rack input
* optional ** if available and used
6. Ground Station Settings
Ground Station 1 Ground Station 2 (if available)

GS Settings j Configuration exported j Configuration exported
j GS Manager screenshots available j GS Manager screenshots available
7. Notes
Name Date Signature
Page 2 of 2
3-68 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance Maintenance
CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE, FAULT LOCATION AND REPAIR
4.1 MAINTENANCE
4.1.1 Introduction to Maintenance Activities
Maintenance of a system can be defined as preventive and corrective maintenance (corrective main
tenance may also be defined as 'Repair' activity in case of a fault). This chapter describes all measures
of preventive maintenance to be performed during the life time of the ground station. Preventive main
tenance is to be performed periodically as indicated in 4.2.
The ground station does not require any periodic calibration and, as such, there are no items which
need to be returned for adjustment. Although, there are no periodic calibration or re-initialization pro
cedures required, basic preventive maintenance must be performed periodically.
The annual inspection should include, but is not limited to, a general check of the condition of power
distributions, conduits, ground connections, lightning rods, RF cable connectors for corrosion or wa
ter intrusion (if applicable). An inspection of the optional GPS antenna and VHF RX antenna and pos
sibly the antenna ground planes for damage or pollution is recommended.
If any fault is detected, refer to section 4.3 Fault Location. After the fault is located, corrective mainte
nance is performed to replace subsystems or subassemblies. This is described in section 4.4.
4.1.2 General Safety Precautions for Maintenance Activities

The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work
safety or operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be always be observed.
The purpose of safety precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be
heeded. General safety precautions for the Thales ADS-B system are also laid down in section 1.4.
of this manual.
The following rules shall be observed in order to prevent accidents:
- Sturdy shoes, safety gloves and safety helmets are to be worn. Safety belts with rescue line and
carbine swivel have to be used when working on elevated locations.
- Test all ladders or stairways for work safety before use
- Test all electrical devices and extension cables for work safety before use
- Remove fuses before carrying out work on mains circuits
- Wear protective goggles when carrying out sanding or drilling operations
- Sand off burr from chisels and punches of metal parts in good time
- Work must not be carried out outside the buildings or on the antenna system during a storm, due
to the danger of injury or death by lightning stroke.
- Station shutdown due to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of
any work which may require operation of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national
regulations
Ed. 10.13 4-1

Maintenance Description, Operation and Maintenance
4.1.2.1 Site-Specific Precautions

It is the task of the site supervisor or construction manager to make available the materials supplied
by Thales, independently procured special materials and tools. For each site, strict attention should
be paid to safety regulations issued by the local authorities.
4.1.3 Work on Equipment Sensitive to Electrostatic Charge

A grounding strip with a large cross-sectional area is connected between the shelter grounding ter
minal, the equipment racks and the worktable to act as the system ground and to eliminate electro
static charges. It is firmly connected to the table and a grounding bus on the working surface.
This system ground should not be connected to either the mains protective ground conductor or to
housings and grounds of external consumers, i.e. consumers not associated with the worktable, ex
cept at the potential equalization bus for the overall installation. The protective ground wire offered
with mains cable or plug connections is not suitable for potential equalization of equipment on a work
table. Depending on local circumstances, it can carry quite high RF interference voltages.
Mains-supplied equipment, power supplies and test equipment should be connected via two-wire
cables and two-pin plugs. For measures to be taken with respect to components sensitive to elec
trostatic charging (MOS, Low Power Schottky) please refer to the customer service documentation
of the manufacturer.
If an employee is required to handle subassemblies for transport purposes, he should place both
hands flat on a grounded surface beforehand (e.g. on the ground bus of the work table). The module
can be picked up by its insulator immediately following this potential equalization. It is safer to avoid
touching the terminals. Only remove short-circuit links where absolutely necessary. Place printed
circuit boards only on tables with a conductive, grounded working surface. Leave individual subas
semblies in the antistatic plastic bags for as long as possible.
Refer also to section 1.4 'General Safety Precautions'.
4.1.3.1 Exchanging Lithium Batteries

State-of-the-art computer systems may contain Lithium batteries for data backup. These are used
in commercial Personal Computers (PC) used for the RCMS/LCMS. If battery replacement is neces
sary, always read the label on the battery before the exchange works. It is recommended to insert only
batteries of the same type according to the recommendations of the manufacturer.
The replacement procedure of the Lithium battery - if one is mounted in the specific device - de
pends on the model used. To perform the change, refer to the COTS manual.
CAUTION
- In case of fire, toxic gases and corrosive liquids may leak out. High fire load.
4-2 Ed. 10.13

4.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE

We recommend performing the maintenance activities listed in the table below. The used interval de
pends on the actual environment and may be defined by the local authorities.
NOTE: During preventive maintenance, the ground station does not need to be switched into a
non-operational mode.
No. Daily maintenance Reference
- No measures -
No. Monthly maintenance
- No measures -
No. Six month maintenance
- No measures -
No. Yearly maintenance
1 Damage check, visual inspection 4.2.1
2 Cleaning of equipment surfaces, cleaning of fans and ventilation openings 4.2.5
3 Change and/or cleaning of dust filter 4.2.5.1
4 Check the Transmitter Power
5 Check the Receiver Sensitivity
No. Three yearly maintenance
6 Preventive exchange of the fan tray 4.2.6
7 Preventive exchange of UPS battery 4.2.8
4.2.1 Damage Check/Visual Inspection

The following outdoor and indoor system parts have to be checked visually for entirety.
Outdoor/Ground Station equipment:
- RX/TX antenna and GPS antenna with all their cables and connections: Check the status of an
tenna installation for any damage.
- Check the complete ground station hardware for any damage.
- Check tight fitting of all RF/AF cable and earthing connections and all cable runs.
- Check the status of the self-vulcanizing tape protection around the connectors.
- Check GS outdoor housing and all device openings for dust, dirt or other obstacle of air flow and
remove it.
Indoor/ATC room equipment:
- State of AX 680 SPU, cables.
- Openings of the AX 680 SPU for dust, dirt or other obstacle of air flow and remove it.
- Check tight fitting of all AF cabling, power supply and earthing connections (internal).
- Check state of central equipment cabinet cabling and interior.
- Check all device openings (fan, grid, ...) for dust, dirt or other obstacle of air flow and remove it.
4.2.2 Data Log of ADS-B or MAGS System

The logging procedure of the complete ADS-B system is referred to as 'Snapshot of Configuration
and Log Files'. This can be performed using the RCMS. The procedure is described in Technical Ma
nual of the MLAT/ADS-B System Software. It creates a snapshot of the present system configuration
and the current log file situation to enable later investigations. The script collects all configuration files
and all log files from the ground stations and puts them into a special file in the given path.
Ed. 10.13 4-3

4.2.3 Checking the Transmitter Power

It is advised to check the power of each transmitter periodically. A simple way is to use a GS-R ground
station as a 'measuring instrument'. The GS-R should receive the signal from the transmitter which
has to be checked.
To check the transmitter power

1. Using the RCMS (for example), log on the GS-R as root.
2. Type the command : gsinfo −stl
This command displays the received power in dBm individually for each received transmitter; listed
as test data columns including the 'sig level' in dBm.
For example, the transmitter with the Mode S address 0038AC9B is received by the ground station
with -29.00 dBm, marked with the arrow in Fig. 4-1.
Fig. 4-1 Display of received TX power in dBm individually for each transmitter (example)
4-4 Ed. 10.13

4.2.4 Checking the Receiver Sensitivity

It is advised to check the sensitivity of each receiver periodically. A simple way to check the sensitivity
is to use the logging ”downlink”.
To check the receiver sensitivity

1. On a CPS, log in as supervisor.
by typing the command: ssh supervisor@cps
2. Make sure that the downlink on this server is activated.
3. Type the command: tail −f /local/data/logs/downlink | grep ”|202|”
Example: '202' is the SIC value of the ground station to be tested.
This command displays all the DF telegrams received by the ground station. The 15th column dis
plays the power level of each received telegram. Fig. 4-2 shows DF telegrams received with power
values smaller than -80 dBm what shows that the measured sensitivity is still acceptable for this
GS.
Fig. 4-2 DF telegrams received by the GS with power of each received telegram (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-5

What information does the 'receiver sensitivity' test provide?

This test shows that the sensitivity is better than -80 dBm. It does not actually measure the absolute
value of the ground station's sensitivity, which is around -90 dBm. If you receive a message with -88
dBm in the sign column, this means that the sensitivity is better than -88 dBm.
If the 'receiver sensitivity' reading is out of range
No immediate remedy action has to be performed. However, the user should be well aware of the
evolution of each ground station's sensitivity. This information will be useful in case the system experi
ences some kind of problems.
If the reading for 'transmitter power' is out of range
You do not measure directly the output power but rather the power level received from another ground
station. The reading value depends on the type of antenna, the length of cables and of course the
distance between the tested TX and the receiver. It is a relative measure. If this value is 3 dB lower
compared to the last measuring period's readings, it also means that the output power is 3 dB lower
compared to the last measuring period's readings.
4.2.5 Cleaning
Required tools: Brush, soft tissue or vacuum cleaner, depending on level of dirt.
ATTENTION
Cleaning aids, such as brushes and dusters, must be made of antistatic material. See also
the safety instructions in section 4.1.3.
The air dust filter of the AX 680 SPU and ventilation openings (air inlet, left; air outlet, right) should
be checked from time to time in accordance with the volume of dirt that accumulates at the particular
location.
Perform this also for the fans and ventilation openings of the UPS devices and the 19” cabinets if appli
cable. The filters should be replaced by new ones before they become clogged. If no new filters are
available, the dirt may - as an exceptional measure - be banged out of the old filter to permit the
filter to be re-used. Damaged filters on the other hand, should not be re-used.
The cabinet ventilation openings (top, bottom) should be checked from time to time in accordance
with the volume of dirt that accumulates at the particular location.
- ADS-B ground station cabinet
To clean the front panels of the various GS subracks, only soap suds or clean water together with
a soft tissue should be used. Don't use alcohol or other kinds of solvents.
Cleaning procedure: Moisten a cloth a little with one of the liquids mentioned above and remove
dirt. Dusting of the subassemblies should only take place in conjunction with removal of a subas
sembly when this becomes necessary in any case for some other purpose. Even then, subassem
blies should only be dusted if dust can be detected by means of a visual check. They should always
be dusted using a soft brush, and if possible with the aid of a vacuum cleaner.
During such operations it is essential to observe all precautionary measures described in section
4.1.3 for voltage-sensitive semiconductors.
- Antenna
Inspect complete antenna and the equipment installation for any damage caused by corrosion,
rodents, termites, or others.
4-6 Ed. 10.13

4.2.5.1 Cleaning the Dust Filter Mat of the Fan Unit
Required Tools: vacuum cleaner (depending on level of dirt)
1. Switch off AC or DC supply of the ground station.
2. Unscrew the captive screw of the fan unit. Withdraw the fan unit with the front handle.
3. At the rear, withdraw the dust filter mat frame with the extractor handle.
4. Carefully beat it clean or use a vacuum cleaner, or if need be insert a new dust filter mat frame.
5. Slide the dust filter mat frame into the slide close to the stop.
6. Carefully slide in the fan unit again and fasten the captive screw.
7. Switch on AC or DC supply of the ground station.
front view rear view

Fault Dust filter mat Filter mat frame
Indicators extractor handle
handle
captive screw Fan unit, removed

withdraw
Fig. 4-3 Fan unit, removing dust filter mat
4.2.6 Preventive Exchange of Fan Unit
As a preventive measure it is recommended to replace the fan unit in the SPU after about 3 years.
Tools required: none
To replace the fan unit (see also section 4.4.6.2)
1. Switch off AC or DC supply of the ground station.
2. Unfasten the captive screw fixing the fan unit.
3. Extract the fan unit with the front handle carefully from the 19” subrack. Recommended: Clean the
air in-/outlet.
4. Carefully insert the new fan unit into the slide until it fits to the connector. Fasten the captive screw.
5. Switch on AC or DC supply of the ground station.
Ed. 10.13 4-7

4.2.7 Preventive Exchange of the Lithium Battery in the RCMS

To back up the NVRAM system data or the real time clock in case of a voltage drop, the devices RCMS
or LCMS can contain a Lithium battery. Lithium batteries age as a result of self-discharging. As a
preventive measure it is recommended to replace a battery after about five years operation. Replace
the battery as described in the correspondent manufacturers COTS documentation.
CAUTION
- In case of fire, toxic gases and corrosive liquids may leak out. High fire load.
4.2.8 Maintenance of the Optional UPS Battery Packs

NOTE: Observe the recommendations of the UPS manufacturer; see COTS user manual [1] or
[2].
Normally the UPS system does not require maintenance, because it contains no serviceable parts.
If the battery service life (about 3 to 5 years at 25 °C ambient temperature) has been exceeded, the
batteries must be exchanged. Contact Thales for service.
If the batteries are to be stored in temperate climatic zones, they should be charged every three
months for 1 to 2 hours. The charging intervals should be shortened to two months at locations sub
ject to high temperatures.
4.2.8.1 Care and Maintenance of the Optional UPS Systems/Batteries
To ensure a long service life of the system, the area around the UPS system should be kept clean and
free of dust. If the area around the system is very dusty, cleaning the outer surfaces of the system
using a vacuum cleaner. To ensure a long service life of the batteries, the ambient temperature should
lie below 25 °C.
NOTE:
- Make sure that the UPS system is switched off and disconnected from the mains power supply
before transporting the UPS system
- The batteries of the UPS system are designed for a service life of 3 to 5 years. However, the service
life of a battery varies depending on the frequency of use and ambient temperature. After expiration
of the expected service life, batteries which continue to be used frequently have reduced running
times. Replace the batteries every five years at the latest so that the system can provide optimal
power at any time
4.2.8.2 Storing the Optional UPS Systems/Batteries

If you store the UPS system over a longer period of time, charge the batteries every six months by
connecting the UPS system to the mains power supply. The internal batteries will charge up to 90 %
of their capacity in less than three hours. Thales recommends charging the batteries for 48 hours after
longer periods of storage (>3 months). If optional battery packs are installed, please refer to the
charging times in the section ”Technical Data” in the COTS manual [1] or [2].
4-8 Ed. 10.13

4.2.8.3 When to Replace Batteries

If the display lights up, the alarm signal sounds and the ”Battery maintenance necessary” message
lights up, the batteries must be replaced. Please contact Thales to order new batteries.
4.2.8.4 Replacing Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R
NOTE: Do not remove the batteries while the UPS system is running in battery mode.
The hot-swap feature allows the batteries to be replaced without shutting down the UPS system and
without having to disconnect the connected loads.
If you prefer to disconnect the UPS system from the mains before replacing the batteries, read the
section ”Shutting down the UPS system”.
CAUTION
Risk of electric shock. Do not perform modifications to the cabling or the connections
of the batteries yourself. Attempting to modify the cabling of the batteries yourself can lead
to serious injuries.
Maintenance work should be performed by qualified technicians only who are experi
enced in working with batteries and understand the necessary safety precautions. Keep
unauthorized personnel away from batteries.
Batteries can pose a risk of electric shock or injury due to high short-circuit currents.
Comply with the following safety precautions:
- Remove watches, jewellery and other metal objects from your body.
- Use only tools with insulated grips and handles.
- Do not place tools or metal parts on to the batteries.
- The batteries may only be replaced with the same number of batteries of the same type.
- Batteries must be disposed of properly. Comply with the local regulations for the proper dis
posal of batteries.
- Batteries may not be incinerated. There is a risk of explosion.
- Refrain from opening or tampering with the batteries. Leaking electrolytes are hazardous to
the eyes and skin. They can be highly toxic.
Ed. 10.13 4-9

4.2.8.5 Replacing the Internal Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R

1. Remove the front cover from the UPS system, see Fig. 4-4. To remove the cover, unscrew and
remove the two screws on the right side of the cover. Grasp the cover on two sides, slide it to the
left and remove it from the housing.
NOTE: A ribbon cable connects the LCD display and the control panel with the UPS. Do not
pull on the cable and do not separate the connection.
Fig. 4-4 Removing the front cover from the UPS control unit (option)
2. Disconnect the internal battery plug connection, see Fig. 4-5.

3. If the cable for an additional battery module is not connected, release this and push it to the left
for better access, see Fig. 4-5.
Fig. 4-5 UPS module connection, front view (option)
4. Unscrew the screws of the battery cover. Grab the battery cover at a corner and pull it carefully
forwards. Take the battery cover and place it to the side.
5. Carefully pull out the battery module insert by the grip and slide the batteries onto a level, stable
support. Support the batteries with both hands.
4-10 Ed. 10.13

NOTE Check whether the replacement batteries have the same specifications like the old
batteries.
6. Replace the batteries in the battery module insert. Observe the safety section 4.2.8.8 'Disposing
of old batteries' for information on proper disposal.
7. Insert the battery module insert with the new batteries into the housing. This requires some effort.
8. Place the battery cover on the screw holders and run the battery connection through the access
slot. Secure the screws again.
NOTE: A small spark can occur when the batteries are connected to the UPS system. This
is normal and does not pose a hazard to people. Quickly and firmly insert the cable
of the batteries into the battery plug connection of the UPS system.
9. Press the plug connections of the internal battery together again. Connect red with red and black
with black. Press both parts together firmly to ensure a good connection.
If the cable for an additional battery module is not connected, secure the cable again to the
corresponding holder on the battery cover, see Fig. 4-5.
10. Reinsert the front cover of the UPS system. For an additional battery module, make sure that the
cable of the battery module is guided through the cable ejection. Slide the cover to the right until
it engages in the holder on the left side of the housing. Reattach the two screws on the right side
of the front cover.
11. Proceed with section 4.2.8.7 'Testing the new batteries'.
4.2.8.6 Replacing the Battery Module of UPS Xanto XS 1000R
CAUTION
The battery module is very heavy. At least two persons are required for lifting the hous
ing.
1. Remove the front cover of each individual battery module, see Fig. 4-6. To remove the cover, un
screw and remove the two screws on the right side of the cover. Grasp the cover on two sides, slide
it to the left and remove it from the housing.
Fig. 4-6 Removing the front cover of the optional battery module
Ed. 10.13 4-11

2. Pull off the cable of the battery module from the UPS system. If additional battery modules are
installed, pull off the cables from the battery connection on every battery module.
3. Replace the battery modules. Observe the safety section 4.2.8.8 'Disposing of old batteries' for
information on proper disposal.
NOTE: A small spark can occur when the battery module is connected to the UPS system. This
is normal and does not pose a hazard to people. Quickly and firmly insert the cable
of the battery module into the battery plug connection of the UPS system.
4. Stick the cable of the battery module into the battery connection of the UPS system, see Fig. 4-7.
Up to four batteries can be connected to the UPS system. Release the plug connection for the bat
tery module at the UPS system and connect the plug connection with the connection to the battery
module. Press both parts together firmly to ensure a good connection.
To connect a second battery module, release the plug connection on the first battery module.
Carefully pull the connection to connect the second battery module. Repeat the procedure for
each additional battery module.
5. Make sure that the connections of the battery modules cannot come undone and that the appropri
ate bending radii and tension relief for all cables is provided for.
Fig. 4-7 Typical installation of multiple battery modules (example)
4-12 Ed. 10.13

6. Inserting the front cover of the battery module. To insert the cover again, make sure that the cables
of the battery module are guided through the cable ejections. Then slide the cover to the right until
it engages in the holder on the right side of the housing. Reattach the two screws on the right side
of the front cover. Repeat the procedure for each additional battery module.
7. Make sure that the complete wiring and all plug connections of the UPS system as well as the bat
tery modules lie behind the front cover and are not accessible to the user.
4.2.8.7 Testing the New Batteries of UPS Xanto XS 1000R
1. Connect the UPS system to the mains power for 48 hours to charge up the batteries.
2. Press any button to activate the menu options. Select ”CONTROL” and then ”START BATTERY
TEST”.
The UPS system starts a battery test when the batteries are completely charged, the UPS system is
in normal mode without active warning messages and the bypass voltage is acceptable. During the
battery test, the UPS system switches to battery mode and discharges the batteries for 25 seconds.
The ” Battery test running” together with the progress in percent is shown on the control panel.
4.2.8.8 Disposing of Old Batteries or UPS Xanto XS 1000R

Contact the recycling centre onsite or a special waste facility for information on disposing of the old
lead-acid batteries or the complete UPS system properly.
CAUTION
Risk of explosion. The battery acid can attack the eyes and skin as well as cause poison
ing. Batteries must not be incinerated. Batteries must be disposed off properly. Inform
yourself about the local disposal regulations. Do not open or damage the batteries.
Ed. 10.13 4-13

4.2.9 UPS Troubleshooting for Xanto RT Series Battery Pack (Option)

The optional UPS is used to provide backup power supply in case of general grid power failure. The
UPS is located in CPS racks or in ground stations.
The UPS can be configured with a web interface, see also section 3.2.3.1
To access, type the IP of the UPS or his synonym. If passwords are needed, try 'cs121-snmp' or
'12ups21'.
The small dots on top show if the doors are configured or not, if it's in warning (open) or closed (green)
etc.
a. Possible failure description:

The MTSC cannot a ground station or a server and displays PC001 SNMP Communication Problem.
Pinging the station should function.
Possible solution #1:
check solution #3 in the CMS section concerning the similar problem.
once you have checked on site, you notice that the surge protection / fuse is off. Each time you try
to pull the fuse to On, it switches off. Try and see if it does it with only the UPS connected. If yes, replace
the UPS unit with a spare.
b. Possible failure description:

The MTSC says the door is always open.
the wires from the sensor cable have been internally (in the cable) switched. They have to be swapped
by a cable technician. Ask for the help of a Thales technician.
if this concerns the UPS Slimline from Benning (24h batteries etc.), then connect to the web page
using the IP address of the Benning interface. If you see the following alarms
S external device 01 fault
S non-urgent error
S alarm rack door
S group signal
then you have to go on site. Next to the LED screen, you will see two boards. The right hand side board
must be taken out and you must check the cables coming from the door contact sensor. You will find
that the cables are either connected side by side (wrong) or connected on a first and last slot (slot
1 and 9) (correct). If it is the first situation, cable to have the second situation present. You should be
able to measure the voltage on the door contact sensor once the card is plugged back inside the
machine. Check the cabling, which might have moved during the transport. The board is not tightly
fixed (the two cards on the left of the LED screen should be pushed in, cables fixed inside as well).
4-14 Ed. 10.13

4.2.10 Exchanging the UPS (Option)
The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto RT1000 version includes a hot swappable battery
while the Xanto RT2000 control unit does not have an internal battery but is connected to an external
battery pack. The UPS is normally installed in the 19” cabinet which houses the ground station. Re
placing the UPS units, observe also the COTS manufacturers manuals.
CAUTION
The output sockets of the UPS system may still be electrically live even if the mains supply
has been disconnected or the mains cable has been disconnected.
4.2.10.1 Exchanging UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 incl. Internal Battery
(Option)
Tools required: Philips Screw Driver #5.
1. Switch off the power supply of the complete system with the internal and external power switch.
2. Set UPS to Standby. Disconnect the mains power cords at the rear.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect the temperature
sensor cable and the intrusion switch cable at the SNMP board.
4. Remove the SNMP board at the rear right side (two screws) if to be used in the spare unit.
5. Carefully unfasten the four screws holding the UPS within the rack in order not to let it drop to
the ground. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Take care of the weight of the unit!
RJ45 Ethernet, SNMP (UPS)

24027 28004
Cabinet door
switch, front COM2 AUX
Breaker (mains input)
SNMP-board
Status door
AC mains external
UPS RT1000 rear AC mains internal
Fig. 4-8 UPS control unit RT1000, rear view

6. Remove the cover at the rear left side of the new UPS unit (two screws). Insert the SNMP board
'DW5SNMP30'.
7. Install new UPS unit into the rack and fasten the four screws.
8. Connect the ETH connection cable to the SNMP board. If applicable, connect the temperature
sensor cable to COM2 and the intrusion switch cable to AUX.
9. Connect the mains power cords at the rear.
10. Switch on the power supply of the complete system with the internal and external power switches.
Ed. 10.13 4-15

4.2.10.1.1 Exchanging the Internal Battery of UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000
The XANTO RT1000 is equipped with a hot-swap battery. This battery can be replaced by the user
while the system is in operation. Use the original battery type for replacement. Observe also the COTS
manufacturer's manual.
Required tools: Philips screw driver #2.
1. Remove the UPS unit's front panel. Grasp the cover left and right and withdraw.
2. Unscrew and remove the two screws in the metal cover. Remove the metal cover.
3. Release the connector between the battery and the UPS.
4. Pull the battery forwards to remove it.
5. Now you can replace the battery. Make sure you only use batteries of the same type. Connect all
3 blocks in series. To do this, connect the positive terminal of the first battery to the negative termi
nal of the next one (and so on) in order to generate a 36 V DC current.
6. Now follow the above disassembly procedure in reverse to reassemble the battery compartment.
battery
battery connector
of battery
screws 2x battery connector
of UPS
handle UPS RT1000
mounted to 19” rack
metal cover
front cover
Fig. 4-9 UPS control unit RT1000, exchange of internal battery, rear view
4-16 Ed. 10.13

4.2.10.2 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT2000 (Option)

2. Set UPS to Standby. Disconnect the mains power cords and the battery cable at the rear.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect Temp. Sensor
cable and intrusion switch cable at SNMP board.
4. Remove the SNMP board at the rear right side (two screws) if to be used in the spare unit.
the ground. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Take care of the weight of the unit !
6. Remove the cover at the rear left side of the new UPS unit (two screws). Insert the SNMP board
'DW5SNMP30'.
7. Install the new UPS unit into the rack and fasten the four screws.
8. Connect the ETH connection cable to the SNMP-board. If applicable, connect temp. sensor to
COM2 and intrusion switch cable to AUX.
9. Connect the mains power cords and the battery cable at the rear.
10. Switch on the power supply of the complete system with the internal and external power switch.
4.2.10.3 Exchanging the UPS Xanto RT2000 Battery Pack (Option)

1. Switch off the power supply of the complete system with the internal and external power switches.
2. Set the UPS to Standby. Disconnect the interconnection battery cable to the control unit.
the ground. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Observe the heavy weight of the unit !
4. Install a new UPS unit into the rack and fasten the four screws.
5. Connect the interconnection battery cable to the extension pack if available.
RJ45 Ethernet, SNMP (UPS) AC mains internal
24027 28004
Cabinet door
SNMP-board
Status door
AC mains external
Battery interconnection
Mains terminals
UPS XRT2000 with battery pack, rear
Fig. 4-10 UPS basic unit and optional extension pack, rear view
Ed. 10.13 4-17

4.2.10.4 Exchanging the Optional SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121)
Tools required: Philips screw driver #2.
2. Set the UPS to standby mode. Disconnect the mains power cords at the rear.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect the temp. sensor
cable and intrusion switch cable at the SNMP board.
4. Loosen two screws and remove the SNMP board at the rear right side of the control unit.
5. Verify the DIP switch settings of the new SNMP board: Check that the two switches of the DIP-
Switch are in position 'OFF' (default IP address = 10.10.10.10), see Fig. 4-11. This is necessary
for the configuration of the SNMP board.
DIP-switch
DIP-switch setting
SW1 SW2 ON
Ethernet RJ45 ON OFF Normal operation

1 2
OFF OFF Default IP address (10.10.10.10)
AUX rear view
COM2 (Temp Sensor)
Fig. 4-11 SNMP board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121)
6. Insert the SNMP board 'DW5SNMP30'. Fasten the two screws.
7. Connect the Ethernet connection cable to the SNMP board. If applicable, connect Temp. Sensor
cable to COM2 and intrusion switch cable to AUX.
8. Connect the mains power cords at the rear of the UPS control unit.
10. Perform the configuration of the SNMP board according to section 4.2.11.
4-18 Ed. 10.13

4.2.11 Configuration of SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30'
This section describes the configuration of the optional SNMP board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121)
used with the UPS Xanto RT1000 and RT2000. After configuration you will be able to communicate
with a computer (RCMS or LCMS) via LAN/WAN with the UPS.
The entire configuration is done using a web browser via a HTML page. New SNMP modules start
on IP address 10.10.10.10 with a web server interface enabled. This is dedicated by the setting of the
Dip switch SW1 and SW2 to 'OFF' (see Fig. 4-11). To access the web manager, a route to this IP
address must be configured in the used laptop (LCMS).
4.2.11.1 Setup and Preparation
1. Connect the LCMS via a crossover cable with the SNMP board of the UPS (see Fig. 4-12).
LCMS UPS control unit RT1000

COM2 AUX
Ethernet cable SNMP-board

(crossover)
In a wired system, this connection can also be done to

the SPU network connector .
Fig. 4-12 LCMS Connection to the UPS for configuration of the SNMP board
2. Switch on the LCMS and wait for booting and login as supervisor.
3. Open a terminal window.
4. Check the IP address of LCMS by typing: ”/sbin/ifconfig”
5. Result should be: 'IP=192.168.23.2' (example IP)
6. Change the IP address to '10.10.10.10' as follows:

S Type ”system−config−network” <Enter>
S Enter root password : ”12lcms21”
S Double-click on 'eth0'
S Change address to '10.10.10.10' and click 'OK'
S Click on button 'Deactivate' (click in the next two windows on 'OK')
S Click on button 'Activate' to save the changes
S Close the window
7. Send a ping to the SNMP board, type: ”ping 10.10.10.10” <Enter>. Wait for an answer.
8. To stop the answers press <CTRL+C>.
9. Click with the right mouse button within the desktop screen.
Ed. 10.13 4-19

10. Select 'Run Program' and type ”firefox” <Enter>. The Firefox Web Browser will be opened with
a blank page (see Fig. 4-13).
NOTE: Other Internet browser can also be used, e.g. Internet Explorer, Opera etc.; example
here: Firefox.
11. Enter in the URL line the IP address ”10.10.10.10” and click 'OK'.
Fig. 4-13 Firefox browser
4.2.11.2 Configuration
1. Select on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-14) the item 'UPS Model & System' (see
Fig. 4-14). The window for the HTTP administrator login will be opened (see Fig. 4-15).
Fig. 4-14 UPS adapter configuration mode (example)
2. Enter the user name ”admin” and the password ”cs121−snmp”. Click 'OK'.
admin
cs121-snmp
Fig. 4-15 Administrator login for configuration (example)
4-20 Ed. 10.13

4.2.11.2.1 Settings of Model & System
1. The following settings must be made:

S UPS Model: select the used type and the correct number of external battery packs used:
'XANTO RT1000' or 'XANTO RT2000+1Batt'
S The items at the left side will be normally filled in automatically.
S At the right side fill in all relevant items like System Name, System Location, System Contact,
Attached Devices and the Battery Installation Date (Fig. 4-16 shows an example).
2. After filling in all items click 'Apply'.
XANTO RT2000 +1Batt
1400 ax680upsB
1400 Ajaccio
20
18 AX680, Dualized Ground station
2400 21.06.2009
Serial
Fig. 4-16 UPS Model & System settings (example)
4.2.11.2.2 Settings of the Network&Security
1. Select on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-14) the item 'Network & Security'.
Fig. 4-17 Network & Security settings (example)
2. The following settings must be made (example see Fig. 4-17):

- Local address (192.168.24.215 for the first UPS, 192.168.24.216 for the second UPS etc.),
- Gateway address (192.168.24.254), Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0).
Ed. 10.13 4-21

- Change Administrator Password to ”12ups21”. Confirm Password. For the UpsMon & SS4
password click 'Clear'. Click on checkbox 'Use UpsMon Password for Web Pages'.
NOTE: Remember the password, because you must start the procedure from beginning
(default settings).
4.2.11.2.3 Settings of SNMP
1. Select on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-14) the item 'SNMP'. The window 'SNMP
Settings' will be opened (see Fig. 4-18).
2. The following settings must be made, to make communication for the UPS available: 'Address',
'Community', 'Permission'.
3. After filling in all items, click 'Apply'.
Fig. 4-18 SNMP settings (example)
4.2.11.2.4 Settings of COM2&AUX, TempMan
1. Select on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-14) the item 'COM2&AUX'.
2. The following COM2 setting must be made (see Fig. 4-19): COM2 Mode 'SM_T_COM'
3. After filling in, click 'Apply'.
4. The following AUX setting must be made (see Fig. 4-19): AUXPort 4 is set for 'Use as Input', if it
is not marked for 'Use as Output'.
4-22 Ed. 10.13

COM2 setting
AUX setting
not marked
Fig. 4-19 Settings of COM2&AUX (example)
6. If a temperature sensor is connected to the COM2 connector, perform the following TempMan set
ting (example see Fig. 4-20); the setting depends on the used sensor:
Sensor Location 'Temperature Sensor 1', Threshold (Low) '0.0' and (High) '100.0' (example)
TempMan setting
Fig. 4-20 Settings of TempMan (example)
4.2.11.2.5 Save Configuration
1. Select on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-14) the item 'Save Configuration'.
The window 'CS121 Configuration Manager' appears (see Fig. 4-22).
2. Select the 'Save Configuration' function on the right side of the window (Fig. 4-22). The following
window appears (see Fig. 4-21):
Fig. 4-21 Save Configuration (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-23

Fig. 4-22 CS121 Configuration Manager (example)
3. Click the 'OK' button and wait until the changes are written to the flash memory (working cursor
is shown). Click 'Reboot'. The following window (Fig. 4-23) appears:
Fig. 4-23 Reboot the adapter (example)
4. Click the 'OK' button and wait until the adapter has been rebooted (working cursor is shown). Wait
at least 180 s and then click 'Reload'.
5. Reset the IP address of LCMS to the original value; shown in section 4.2.11.1 step #4.
Refer to section 4.2.11.1 step #5 for the procedure.
4.2.11.3 Normal Operation

The next step is to change the adapter to normal operation:
1. Switch the UPS to 'OFF'.
2. Disconnect the UPS from main power.
3. Remove the SNMP board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro from the UPS control unit.
4. Change the DIP switch 1 to 'ON' and 2 to 'OFF' (see Fig. 4-11).
5. Insert the SNMP board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro again.
6. Connect the UPS to the main power.
7. Switch the UPS to 'ON'.
Select 'Run Program' and type ”firefox”, hit <Enter>.
4-24 Ed. 10.13

9. Enter the URL line the IP address you set during the configuration phase (see section
4.2.11.2.2 'Settings of the network') and hit <Enter>.
10. Wait until the adapter has been booted. The following window with the UPS status is shown.
11. Click 'AUX & SensorMan'. The status of in the tree view below 'CS121 Status' is displayed.
Check that a field with headline 'SM_T_COM Status' exists with the following entries:
Location: Temp. Sensor 1
Value: {current temperature in the cabinet}
Unit: Degree Celsius
Threshold (Low): 0.0
Threshold (High): 100.0
If the field does not exist or does not show the correct entries, check the cables and connectors
of the temperature sensor and retry.
Fig. 4-24 Normal Operation, UPS Status (example)
4.2.11.4 Reconfigure the UPS

1. To change the settings of the UPS adapter, enter from normal operation into the configuration
menu of the UPS adapter.
2. After changing the entries within a window, click on 'Apply' before you change to the next
configuration menu point.
NOTE: Don't forget to save the new configuration as described in section 4.2.11.2.5 'Save
Configuration'.
Ed. 10.13 4-25

4.2.12 Maintenance Recommendations for Lightning/EMP Protectors

This section gives an overview about the maintenance requirements of Quarter-wave lightning/EMP
protectors and Gas discharge tube (GDT) lightning/EMP (Electromagnetic Pulse) protectors.
NOTE: Maintaining the lightning protectors depends on the specific type used on site. It is
strongly recommended to regard the manufacturer's guide lines. The description below
is based on the explanations of the standard supplier of Thales.
Quarter-Wave Lightning Protector Gas Discharge Tube Lightning Protector
Fig. 4-25 Lightning protectors/EMP protectors (examples)

The following warning applies for both, Quarter-Wave and Gas Discharge Tube lightning protectors/
EMP protectors.
CAUTION
Disconnect or switch off in-line equipment when installing, checking, disconnecting and
connecting EMP protectors. This includes also the exchange of gas discharge tubes.
Keep back from such activities during thunderstorms.
Be aware that only a complete protection system according to IEC 62305 can protect your
equipment and personnel against the impact of lightning. This includes an external light
ning protection system with air terminal, down-conductor and grounding system and
bonding of all incoming and outgoing lines (e.g. protectors for mains, data and telephone
lines) - not RF lines only.
With gas discharge tube protectors take care that the GDT has been properly installed
before putting the equipment into operation.
4.2.12.1 Quarter-Wave Lightning/EMP Protectors

Quarter-wave lightning/EMP protectors are basically maintenance-free. However, it is recommen
ded to check the condition of the grounding/bonding system connections and its connector interfa
ces in the context of a routine system maintenance. Apply a thin layer of contact grease if the ground
bonding shows corrosion traces. Connector interfaces which are heavily damaged by current over
load (in excess of specification) caused by direct lightning hits will lead to increased reflections and
will be detected by the return loss tracing circuit of the transmitter anyway. Field experience shows
that lightning protectors are not the only components which can be affected in such cases of direct
hits.
Recommendation:
Check and, if necessary change the quarter-wave lightning/EMP protectors yearly. It is also impor
tant to check the good condition of all grounding/bonding connections and connector interfaces
yearly.
4-26 Ed. 10.13

4.2.12.2 Gas Discharge Tube (GDT) Lightning/EMP Protectors
Gas discharge tube protectors use different technology but are still very reliable products. However,
degradation of the GDT is possible due to surge current overload and multiple loads at the specifica
tion limit. A lot of previously performed tests reveal that there is a large safety margin built into the used
GDTs. Even with excessive overload the capsules (= 'pills') maintain at least their dynamic switching
performance (dynamic spark-over voltage specification) which determines the residual pulse ampli
tude left by transient surges during lightning events.
Any destruction of the GDT caused by a heavy overload would lead to a short due to its unique and
special design and a service will be necessary anyway. The GDT design features an easy access to
the GDT's pills and the pill exchange is quickly made. Usually the GDT's screw cap is hand-tight and
can be opened and closed easily.
Generally, inspection and maintenance schedules depend on the grade and frequency of surge
loads. This is determined by the isokeraunic level (number of thunderstorm days, which decreases
with latitude) of the operation area and several factors which determine the exposure of the equipment
(e.g. altitude, country profile, nearby structures, water, etc., and even the existence of a lightning pro
tection system). This is the reason why only the operator or the meteorological service can judge the
inspection requirements of their equipment, according to the actual exposure. The operator can
adapt his maintenance exchange interval according to site-specific requirements or his own servic
ing needs. This servicing and maintenance task can also include to define a certain radius (e.g. 5 km
or less) around the site, where a lightning strike has been observed (e.g. by the meteorological ser
vice) and to exchange all GDT protectors within this range.
Recommendations:
As a general rule, Thales recommends to test the static spark-over voltage of the GDT in the course
of a routine inspection every 2 years and to exchange any suspective or failing part. A suitable test
unit can be supplied by Thales (MFR H+S; P/N 9075.99.0053). However, the GDT supplier's recom
mendation for this procedure should also be mentioned which is 5 years.
As an alternative, a general preventive overall replacement of the capsules every 2 years (or 5 years
in certain cases) without testing might be more cost-effective.
After a direct hit, causing damages in the antenna system, the capsules of the GDT protectors in
volved must be exchanged during the service in any case.
Replace the gas discharge capsules by opening the GDT holder, exchange the capsule and fasten
the GDT holder screw hand-tightly again.
NOTE: Closely follow the COTS document [7] 'General Mounting and Grounding Instructions for
EMP protectors' given by the supplier Huber & Suhner.
Hint for Fault Location: If transmission (Tx) is failed, check the state of the GDT lightning protector
pills. Exchange if damaged.
Ed. 10.13 4-27

4.2.12.3 Lightning/Surge Protector Gas Capsule Test Set (Option)
To test the pills, a lightning/surge protector gas capsule test set is offered (HS ref. no. 9075.99.0053).
Fig. 4-26 Lightning/surge protector gas capsule test set (example)
Electrical / Mechanical Specifications

Device Lightning/surge protector gas capsule test set
HS ref. no. 9075.99.0053
Open circuit voltage rate of rise 200 V/s or 1000 V/s
Maximum output voltage 1000 V
Useable measuring range 10 ... 1000 V
Test current for clamping devices 1 mA ± 10 %
Test current for crowbar devices > 1A
Measurement accuracy 0.5 %
Power supply 3x Lithium batteries CR-P2 6V
Battery life @ 200 V/s 10000 tests
@ 1000 V/s 50000 tests
Dimensions HxWxD 175 mm x 125 mm x 40 mm
Weight 0.53 kg
Environmental Specification
Temperature Range: operating: 0 ...+50 °C
survival: -10 ... +60 °C
4-28 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance Fault Location
4.3 FAULT LOCATION

4.3.1 General
To perform maintenance activities, the user must login at the RCMS or LCMS. Fault detection is pos
sible down to LRU level (subsystem or selected subassemblies in the AX 680 SPU) to support the
replacement of the failing LRU.
4.3.2 Power Supply, Subsystem Indicators

The BITE of the individual subsystems indicates faulty operating voltages, so that the defective
subsystem can be defined and replaced.
Before replacing the AC/DC converter (or optional DC/DC converter) check the external power supply
fed to the equipment. Before locating a fault, try to define roughly the defective functional LRU, i.e.
the AX 680 SPU (with SPB3 and PTM) or options like UPS devices.
Also check external equipment:
- Antenna and antenna connections
- Ethernet interface to communication network
- Mains and/or DC (if applicable) power supply cable
A first localization is done by evaluating the Fail or Power indicators (LED) on the various subsystems.
Step Fault A B C
SPU
1 AC/DC conv. Power-LED off? AC switched to ON? AC input power available?
If yes, check fuses:
Replace once if blown.
Fault-LED on? AC power available? If ok, AC/DC converter or

other subassembly may
cause the fault:
replace a subassembly
one after the other and
check if fault remains.
2 DC/DC conv. Power-LED off? External DC switched to ON? DC input power available?
(optional) If yes, check fuses:
Fault-LED on? DC power available? If ok, DC/DC converter or

other subassembly may
cause the fault:
replace a subassembly
one after the other and
check if fault remains.
3 Fan Unit FAN FAIL on? Fan or fan control is faulty. Replace Fan unit.
GS FAIL on? Other Fail indication at SPU? Check cabling and station
4 SPB3 board LED FAIL on? Power available to GS? Yes. Replace SPB3 board.
Check check cabling, antenna If fault at SPB3, Replace

or setup. Read out BITE report SPB3 board.
Ed. 10.13 4-29

Fault Location Description, Operation and Maintenance
Step Fault cont. A B C

5 PTM board POSITION FAIL on? LED ANTENNA status red? Check if LNA supply is lit.
If not check cabling, an
tenna or setup.
LED ANTENNA status green? Check PTM or setup.
TIME FAIL on? LED ANTENNA status red? Check if LNA supply is lit.
If not check cabling, an
tenna or setup.
LED ANTENNA status green? Check PTM or setup.
UPS RT1000/
RT2000
6 UPS does not Breaker at the rear off? No, switch ON. If released again, check.
back-up the UPS switched on? No, switch ON.
system. Battery charged? No, charge battery
LED LINE on? No, AC input power available? No, check AC input fuse.
LED Bypass lit? Yes, switch to normal mode.
LED Battery flashing? - Battery faulty, Replace battery

- Charging voltage too high Check voltage and correct
4.3.3 Troubleshooting UPS Subsystem XS 1000R

The optional UPS battery XANTO XS 1000R is designed for automatic operation and reports any oc
curring problems during operation automatically. Normally, the warning messages shown on the con
trol panel do not mean that the output voltage is affected. It is usually a preventative message in
tended to make the user aware of a problem.
General explanations:
1. Events are often procedures without directly perceivable effects which are recorded in the event
log as status information. Example ”Clock Set Done”.
2. Information is announced by audio signal at intervals of 5 seconds, recorded in the event log and
displayed on the LCD. Examples: Battery mode and Bypass mode.
3. Warning messages are indicated by an audio signal at one second intervals, recorded in the event
log and displayed on the LCD and the warning display lights up. Examples: Site Wiring Fault and
Over Temperature.
The troubleshooting table in the XS 1000R's COTS manual [1] will help you determine which status
of the UPS system has triggered the respective event.
4.3.3.1 Typical Warning and Status Messages

To check the XS 1000R status menu on a list of active warning messages
1. Press any button to activate the menu options.
2. Press the button until the ”UPS STATUS” is displayed.
3. Press the button to display the list of active warning messages.
The detailed troubleshooting explanations can be found in the XS 1000R's COTS manual [1].
4-30 Ed. 10.13

4.3.4 Performing Tests

This section describes recommended test procedures to localise a faulty component presuming fol
lowing fault characteristics:
- BITE Failure (indication: red) refer to section 4.3.4.1
- No Network Connection refer to section 4.3.4.2
- No Raw Data refer to section 4.3.4.3
- No ASTERIX Data refer to section 4.3.4.4
4.3.4.1 Troubleshooting Software-Monitored Items

4.3.4.1.1 GPS Fault
- If on site: Is a GPS PTM board present at all (see SPU, lower slot)?
- If on site: Does the GPS PTM board show a fault (any red LED on front panel) ?
- If on site: Is the GPS antenna connected?
- If on site: Does the GPS PTM board front panel LED 'Antenna' indicate green: antenna connected
and DC current to GPS LNA within limits?
NOTE: If there is a short circuit or fault in the antenna dc supply, the PTM breaks the DC supply to the antenna. This state is latched.
To activate the DC supply again after correction, switch off and on SPU, or withdraw and insert again the PTM board.
- If on site: Does the GPS PTM board front panel LED '1PPS' show a flash once per second?
- On the GS Manager page 'Groundstation', is 'GPS' 'enabled'?
Is 'Time Synchronisation based on' set to 'gps'?
- On the GS Manager page 'GPS', is a 'Type - Version' indicated?
- Does it announce 'GPS Data' 'available'?
- Is there a 'HPL' value and the 'No. of Satellites (HPL)' different to 0?
- Is the current position deviation between declared ground station position and measured GPS
position lower than the configured threshold?
- Is the current time deviation between GPS and system clock lower than the configured threshold?
4.3.4.1.2 TX Failure
If the systems fails to transmit, check the following items:
- The state of the GDT lightning protector pills. Exchange if damaged.
Note: The effects of damaged pills are very difficult to detect when doing the VSWR tests, because
the VSWR test is conducted at a low power level.
- The antenna installation
- The state of the transmitter unit (TXU)
4.3.4.1.3 Fault in the RF Path

- If on site: Does the SPB3 board front panel LED 'DC' indicate green: antenna connected and DC
current to antenna within limits?
- If the SPB3 is ok, the ADS-B RX antenna or the connecting cable is broken.
Ed. 10.13 4-31

4.3.4.2 Tests if no Network Connection

4.3.4.2.1 If on Site: Check cables
- Is a straight Ethernet cable connected between the main interface (NET1) and the router?
- Is a crossover Ethernet cable connected between auxiliary interface and LCMS?
4.3.4.2.2 Check Network Connection
- Login into the ground station: either from the other network connection, if available, or better from
the serial interface (if on site).
- If not possible try the next step below from outside, i.e. the following unit on the network (e.g. the
LCMS).
- Enter the command ”ping <IP−Address of next unit on network>” (this could be e.g. the
router or the LCMS) to see if a connection can be established at all on low protocol level.
- Verify both units belong to the same network (e.g. both units' interfaces have the same front part
of the IP address (first three numbers), like '192.168.23.4').
At the LCMS, enter command ”/sbin/ifconfig −a”. Look for the ETH address in the first line.
4.3.4.3 Tests if no Raw Data
Any BITE failure? If yes, try looking at more detail in the MCS (GS Manager); see also previous tests.
4.3.4.3.1 Check Output Configuration
- On the GS Manager page 'Network', check that 'Output' of 'Raw Data Stream' is 'enabled' on the
affected output 'Port'.
- Check that its destination 'IP-Address'/'Port' is consistent with the intended output interface and
the IP address/port settings of the destination.
4.3.4.3.2 Check Reception
- If on site: Is there any valid Mode S input signal at all?

RX LED on the SPU/SPB3 active?
Can at least the Test Transmission be received (provided it is properly connected and active it
should always be received, see previous tests)?
- If on site, check the cables: Is a RF antenna cable connected between SPU/SPB3 and the Ex
change Panel (optional), and between the Exchange Panel (optional) and the antenna?
- If on site, try recording raw data if another network interface is available. Are there any messages
at all?
- Configuration flaws could also be a reason.
Check the message filter settings (see Software Manual, SPB3 Parameter Page 'Message Filter').
4-32 Ed. 10.13

4.3.4.4 Tests if no Asterix Data
- Any BITE failure? If yes, try looking at more detail in the GS Manager software page (see also pre
vious tests).
- On the GS Manager page 'ADS-B': verify that the 'No. of targets' is greater zero.
If yes, focus on output segment (see section 4.3.4.4.1 ).
4.3.4.4.1 Check Output Configuration
- On the GS Manager page 'Network', check that Asterix data 'Output' is enabled on the affected
output port.
- Check that its destination IP address/Port is consistent with the intended output interface and the
IP address/port settings of the destination.
- On the GS Manager page 'System': verify that the SIC/SAC settings match the expected value of
the receiving element (e.g. TSD, AC21, ATC center).
4.3.4.4.2 Check Input Configuration
- On the GS Manager page 'Message Filter': verify that at least 'DF-17 Extended Squitter', 'DF-18
TIS-B/NTD' and 'DF-19 Mil. Extended Squitter' are enabled.
- On the GS Manager page 'ADS-B': verify that the 'Maximum receiver range' is set to a reasonable
value e.g. 500 NM.
Ed. 10.13 4-33

4-34 Ed. 10.13

Description, Operation and Maintenance Repair
4.4 REPAIR
4.4.1 General
The repair activities are designed to restore the 'ready' condition of a faulty system in the shortest
possible time. In most cases, the system is repaired by replacing the defective subassembly.
Subassemblies and components, which are sent to the manufacturer for repair or returns, must be
packed in a way that no damage of the parts could arise. It is recommended to use the original pack
ing, e.g. of the spare part, or a comparable packing in corresponding performance to ensure a safe
shipping of defective subassemblies or components. Regard section 4.1.3 handling subassemblies
with electrostatically sensitive components.
4.4.2 Safety Precautions for Repair Works
4.4.2.1 General Safety Regulations
The safety regulations laid down by the local authorities (e.g. concerning accident prevention, work
safety or operation of electronic equipment and navigation systems) must be observed at all times.
The purpose of safety precautions is to protect persons and property, and they must always be
heeded.
- Work should not be carried out outside the shelter or on the antenna system during a storm, due
to the danger of injury by lightning.
- Station shutdown due to repair and maintenance: The responsible authorities must be notified of
any work which may require operation of the system to be interrupted, in accordance with national
regulations.
- Change of system parameters is only allowed for maintenance personnel with specific access level
(i.e. 'Supervisor') to the LCMS or RCMS.
CAUTION
Before replacing a subsystem connected to mains, shut down mains supply. The supply
voltage (AC or DC) must always be disconnected before removing or installing subsys
tems, fuses or cables.
4.4.3 Replacing Subsystems and Individual Subassemblies (LRU)
Tools required: Screw driver set.
The relevant subsystems must be de-energized before removing or installing:
1. Switch off AC or DC of the respective subsystem: Switch off the mains AC switch of the AX 680
SPU. If DC option used, switch off external DC supply. Remove the mains or DC supply cable.
The following steps are a general procedure for all LRU's. Special procedures are described in 4.4.5.
Ed. 10.13 4-35

Repair Description, Operation and Maintenance
CAUTION
Take care when removing or inserting cables to the MicroSubD connectors. Fixing screws
of the SubD cable connectors have to be tightened to the SubD connector bolts with max.
40 Ncm. Use a torque wrench.
2. Carefully remove the concerned cables from the subsystem or subassembly to be changed.
3. All SPU subassemblies can now easily be removed:

- unfasten the captive screws holding the subassembly,
- press the corrugated locker button in the extraction handle (SPB3, PTM both sides) and move
the extraction handles simultaneously to withdraw the respective board, as shown in Fig. 4-27.
Exception AC/DC or DC/DC converter:
Additionally loosen the screws fixing the front panel to the 19” rack. The AC/DC or optional DC/DC
converter have only one extraction handle. Pull the subassembly carefully out from the subrack.
4. In order to insert a subassembly, gently push it into its position in the subrack and lock to the sub
rack with the extraction handles. Finally fasten all captive screws again.
5. Carefully connect the pertinent cable connectors to the subsystem:

Use a torque wrench tool. Tighten all screws of the SubD cable connectors with max. 40 Ncm.
6. Check that all the cables have been connected correctly before switching the subsystem on again.
captive screws (example) captive screw

Fan Unit
Air Inlet Dust Filter Air outlet
MAINT ETH2 TX I/O RX FAIL BITE TT out RF In

SPB3
Console
FAN FAIL
GS FAIL Reset TX TT
THALES
AC Power Supply
POSITION TIME FAIL BITE 1PPS Antenna LNA
FAIL DC Fault
Power
RF Input
handle captive screw Power Supply
withdraw corrugated locker button withdraw
extraction handle
subassembly
SPU housing front
Fig. 4-27 Removing subassemblies of SPU (example)
4-36 Ed. 10.13

4.4.3.1 Replacing Fuses of SPU
Blown fuses are allowed to be replaced only once. If the fuses blow again, check the equipment for
the reason, e.g. short circuits. The exchangeable fuses are located within the DC or AC connector
at the rear of the SPU housing.
rear of SPU rear of SPU open here rear of SPU Fuse (2x)
Fuse holder 1/4x1-1/4”
hinged cover
Fuse holder front

Fuse holder
hinged cover
supply cable
position of small fuses
leave 1. clamp open
rear of SPU
Fig. 4-28 Replacing fuses of the AX 680 SPU
To replace a fuse
1. Switch off the SPU.
2. Remove the power supply cable from the DC or AC connector.
3. Open the hinged cover carefully with a suitable auxiliary tool, e.g. a small screw driver blade or a
knife.
4. Withdraw the fuseholder and replace the fuses. If small fuses (20 mm x 5 mm) are used, mind their
position.
5. Insert the fuseholder up to the stop, close the hinged cover, connect the supply cable again.
6. Switch on the SPU.
4.4.4 Replacing Cables of SPU
To replace a SPU cable

The relevant subsystems must be de-energized before removing or installing.
1. Switch off DC of the Signal Processing Unit. If AC is optionally used: Switch off the mains switch.
Remove the DC or mains or the DC supply cable.
2. Carefully remove the cable connectors from the respective sockets.
3. Connect the new cable carefully to the pertinent connector of the subsystem:
Tighten the screws of the SubD cable connector with max. 40 Ncm. Use a torque wrench tool.
4. Check that the cables have been connected correctly before switching the subsystem on again.
Ed. 10.13 4-37

4.4.5 Specific Procedures for SPU Subassemblies

4.4.5.1 Exchanging the SPB3
Tools required: Philips screw driver #2
NOTE: Check and note the current settings of jumper X6 and X13 on the board before replace
ment.
1. Connect the maintenance Laptop (LCMS) with the crossover Ethernet cable to the Maintenance
port located on the SPB3 front.
2. Open the GS Manager, refresh all pages. Change to the 'BITE' page and enable Maintenance
Mode.
3. Disconnect the LCMS from the ground station.
5. Unfasten the two screws holding the SPB3. Extract the SPB3 by gently pressing the extraction
handles outwards.
6. Carefully insert a new SPB3 into the slide. Verify that the handles lock into the side railings.
7. Switch on the ground station. Connect the maintenance Laptop (LCMS) with the crossover
Ethernet cable to the Maintenance port located on the SPB3 front.
8. Refresh all pages of the GS Manager. Change to the software page.
9. Upload the latest Kernel as Kernel 2.
10. Upload the latest application as application 2.
11. Upload the latest configuration file (site-independent parameters only).
12. Set site-specific parameters including the ground station's correct IP address, position, etc. to
the intended values.
13. Refresh the GS Manager and verify that all parameter settings are as intended. Verify that all BITE
tests are OK.
14. Reboot the ground station.
15. Refresh all pages of the GS Manager.
16. Verify that all parameter settings are as intended. Verify that all BITE tests are OK.
17. Change to the 'BITE' page and disable the maintenance mode.
19. Fasten the two screws holding the SPB3.
4-38 Ed. 10.13

4.4.5.2 Exchanging the PTM1 (optional)

NOTE: Check and note current setting of jumpers on the board before replacement.
1. Connect the maintenance Laptop (LCMS) with the crossover Ethernet cable to the maintenance
2. Open GS manager, refresh all pages. Change to 'BITE' page and enable maintenance mode.
4. Disconnect the GPS antenna cable.
5. Unfasten 2 screws holding the PTM. Extract the PTM by gently pressing the extraction handles
outwards.
6. Carefully insert a new PTM into the slide. Verify that the handles lock into the side railings.
7. Reconnect the GPS antenna cable.
8. Switch on the ground station.
tests are ok.
10. Change to the 'BITE' page and disable the maintenance mode.
12. Fasten the two screws fixing the PTM.
4.4.6 Exchanging the PTM2 (optional)
Exchanging the PTM2 board is very similar like exchanging the PTM1 board, see section 4.4.5.2.
However, with the PTM2 board observe the Caution note below.
ATTENTION
Danger of Equipment Damage. The optional PTM2 board is not hot-pluggable. The
PTM2 board will be damaged if the contact pins on the board's bottom side are short-cir
cuited while being voltage-supplied.
To prevent damage, ensure that power is removed from the AX 680 SPU unit before pull
ing out the PTM2 board from the SPU subrack or while inserting. There is a gasket cord
round the SPU subrack's slot which is made of electrically conducting material.
Ed. 10.13 4-39

4.4.6.1 Exchanging the Power Supply

1. Connect the maintenance Laptop (LCMS) with the crossover Ethernet cable to the maintenance
2. Open the GS Manager, refresh all pages. Change to the 'BITE' page and enable maintenance
mode.
4. Disconnect the power cord at the rear.
5. Unfasten the four screws fixing the power supply. Unfasten the grip with the small locker button.
Extract the power supply by gently pressing the extraction handle outwards.
6. Carefully insert a new power supply into the slide. Verify that the handle locks into the side railing.
7. Reconnect the power cord at the rear.
tests are ok.
10. Change to the 'BITE' page and disable maintenance mode.
12. Fasten the four screws fixing the power supply.
4.4.6.2 Exchanging the Fan Unit of SPU

1. Switch off ground station's AC or DC supply.
2. Unfasten the captive screw fixing the fan unit.
3. Extract the fan unit carefully from the 19” subrack until. Recommended: Clean the air in/outlet.
4. Carefully insert the new fan unit into the slide. Fasten the captive screw.
5. Switch on AC or DC of the ground station.
4.4.7 Exchanging the Peripheral Equipment

Due to the fact that the installation and mounting of the RX antenna and GPS antenna depend on the
local environment, which may change from site to site, the following is a general instruction how to
proceed. In detail, local procedures have to be observed.
4.4.7.1 Exchanging the RX Antenna

2. Remove the RF cables.
3. Replace the RX antenna.
4. Reconnect the RF cables.
4-40 Ed. 10.13

4.4.7.2 Exchanging the GPS Antenna

2. Remove the RF cable.
3. Replace the GPS antenna.
4. Reconnect the RF cables.
4.4.7.3 Exchanging the RCMS
1. Login into the ground station. There are two options:

- from the other network connection
- if on site, use the LCMS
2. Select the 'GS Manager' and refresh all pages; select the pertinent ground station and set it to ex
ecution mode 'Maintenance'.
3. Switch off the RCMS workstation using the on/off switch on its rear side.
4. Remove all cables from the RCMS.
5. Replace the RCMS workstation.
6. Reconnect all cables.
7. Switch on the new RCMS workstation using the on/off switch.
8. Perform the RCMS software re-installation procedure. See Technical Manual MAGS Part 2,
section 'MAGS LCMS / RCMS SOFTWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE'.
9. Using the LCMS with the 'GS Manager', refresh all pages.
Select the pertinent ground station and set it to the execution mode 'Operational'.
Ed. 10.13 4-41

4.4.7.4 UPS Troubleshooting (Option)

The optional UPS is used to provide backup power supply in case of general grid power failure. The
UPS is located in CPS racks or in ground stations.
The UPS can be configured with a web interface, see also section 3.2.3.1
To access, type the IP of the UPS or his synonym. If passwords are needed, try 'cs121-snmp' or
'12ups21'.
The small dots on top show if the doors are configured or not, if it's in warning (open) or closed (green)
etc.
a. Possible failure description:

The MTSC cannot a ground station or a server and displays PC001 SNMP Communication Problem.
Pinging the station should function.
check solution #3 in the CMS section concerning the similar problem.
once you have checked on site, you notice that the surge protection / fuse is off. Each time you try
to pull the fuse to On, it switches off. Try and see if it does it with only the UPS connected. If yes, replace
the UPS unit with a spare.
b. Possible failure description:

The MTSC says the door is always open.
the wires from the sensor cable have been internally (in the cable) switched. They have to be swapped
by a cable technician. Ask for the help of a Thales technician.
if this concerns the UPS Slimline from Benning (24h batteries etc.), then connect to the web page
using the IP address of the Benning interface. If you see the following alarms
S external device 01 fault
S non-urgent error
S alarm rack door
S group signal
then you have to go on site. Next to the LED screen, you will see two boards. The right hand side board
must be taken out and you must check the cables coming from the door contact sensor. You will find
that the cables are either connected side by side (wrong) or connected on a first and last slot (slot
1 and 9) (correct). If it is the first situation, cable to have the second situation present. You should be
able to measure the voltage on the door contact sensor once the card is plugged back inside the
machine. Check the cabling, which might have moved during the transport. The board is not tightly
fixed (the two cards on the left of the LED screen should be pushed in, cables fixed inside as well).
4-42 Ed. 10.13

4.4.8 Exchanging the UPS (Xanto RT1000 or Xanto RT2000)
The optional Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Xanto RT1000 version includes a hot-swappable
battery while the Xanto RT2000 control unit does not have an internal battery. The Xanto RT2000 is
rather connected to an external battery pack.
The UPS is normally installed in the 19” cabinet which houses the Ground Station. Replacing the UPS
units, also observe the COTS manufacturers manual [2].
CAUTION
4.4.8.1 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000 incl. Internal Battery
1. Switch off the power supply of the complete system with the internal and external power switches.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect the Temp. Sensor
cable and the intrusion switch cable at the SNMP board.
4. Remove the SNMP card at the rear right side (two screws) if to be used in the spare unit.
5. Carefully unfasten the four screws holding the UPS within the rack. Take care not to let it drop
down. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Take care of the device's heavy weight!
7. Remove the cover at the rear left side (two screws). Insert the SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30'.
8. Connect the Ethernet connection cable to the SNMP card.
If applicable, connect the Temp. Sensor cable to COM2 and the intrusion switch cable to AUX.
9. Connect the mains power cords at the rear.


24027 28004
Cabinet door
SNMP-board
Status door AC mains external
UPS RT1000 rear AC mains internal
Fig. 4-29 UPS control unit RT1000 (option), rear view
Ed. 10.13 4-43

4.4.8.1.1 Exchanging the Internal Battery of UPS Control Unit Xanto RT1000
The XANTO RT1000 is equipped with a hot-swap battery, which means that the battery can be
replaced by the user while the system is in operation. Use original battery type for replacement.
Also observe the COTS manufacturer manual [2].

1. Remove the UPS unit's front panel. Grasp the cover left and right and withdraw.
2. Unscrew and remove the two screws in the metal cover. Remove the metal cover.
3. Release the connector between the battery and the UPS.
4. Pull out the battery in order to remove it.
5. Now you can replace the battery. Make sure you only use new batteries of the same type.
Connect all 3 battery blocks in series. To do this, connect the positive terminal of the first battery
to the negative terminal of the next one (and so on) in order to generate a 36 VDC line connection.
6. Follow the above disassembly procedure in reverse to reassemble the battery compartment.
battery
battery connector
of battery
screws 2x battery connector

of UPS
handle UPS RT1000
mounted to 19” rack
metal cover
front cover
Fig. 4-30 UPS control unit RT1000, exchange of internal battery (option), rear view
4.4.8.2 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT2000
1. Switch off the power supply of the complete system using the internal and external power switch.
2. Set the UPS to Standby. Disconnect the mains power cords and the battery cable at the rear.
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect the Temp. Sensor
cable and the intrusion switch cable at the SNMP board.
4-44 Ed. 10.13

4. Remove the SNMP card at the rear right side (two screws) if to be used in the spare unit.
5. Carefully unfasten the four screws holding the UPS within the rack. Take care not to let it drop
down. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Take care of the device's heavy weight!
7. Remove the cover at the rear left side (two screws). Insert the SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30'.
8. Connect the Ethernet connection cable to the SNMP card. If applicable, connect Temp. Sensor
to COM2 and intrusion switch cable to AUX.
9. Connect the mains power cords and the battery cable at the rear.
4.4.8.3 Exchanging UPS Xanto RT2000 Battery Pack
2. Set the UPS to standby. Disconnect the interconnection battery cable to the control unit.
3. Carefully unfasten the four screws holding the UPS within the rack in order not to let it drop to the
ground. Carefully slide out the UPS unit. Take care of the high device weight !
5. Connect the interconnection battery cable to the extension pack if available.

temp. sensor manager (option) AC mains internal
24027 28004
Cabinet door
SNMP-board
Status door
AC mains external
Battery interconnection
Mains terminals
UPS XRT2000 with battery pack, rear
Fig. 4-31 UPS basic unit and optional extension pack (option), rear view
Ed. 10.13 4-45

4.4.8.4 Exchanging the Optional SNMP Board 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121)
3. Disconnect the Ethernet connection cable at the rear. If applicable, disconnect Temp. Sensor
cable and intrusion switch cable at the SNMP card.
4. Loosen two screws and remove the SNMP card at the rear right side of the control unit.
5. Verify the DIP switch settings of the new SNMP card: Check that the two switches of the DIP-
switch are in position 'OFF' (default IP Address = 10.10.10.10), see Fig. 4-32. This is necessary
for the configuration of the SNMP card.
6. Insert the SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30'. Fasten two screws.
7. Connect the Ethernet connection cable to the SNMP card. If applicable, connect Temp. Sensor
cable to COM2 and intrusion switch cable to AUX.
8. Connect the mains power cords at the rear of the UPS control unit.
10. Perform configuration of the SNMP board according section 4.4.9.
DIP-switch
DIP-switch setting
SW1 SW2 ON
Ethernet RJ45 ON OFF Normal operation

1 2
OFF OFF Default IP address (10.10.10.10)
AUX rear view
COM2 (Temp Sensor)
Fig. 4-32 SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121) (option)
4.4.9 Configuring the SNMP Card 'DW5SNMP30' (CS121)
This section describes the configuration of the optional SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30' Pro (CS121) used
with the UPS Xanto RT1000 and RT2000. After configuration you will be able to communicate with
a computer (RCMS or LCMS) via LAN/WAN with the UPS.
The entire configuration is done with a web browser via a HTML page. New SNMP modules start on
IP address 10.10.10.10 with a web server interface enabled. This is dedicated by setting the Dip-
switches SW1 and SW2 to 'OFF' (see Fig. 4-32). To access the web manager, a route to this IP ad
dress must be configured in the used Laptop (LCMS).
4-46 Ed. 10.13

4.4.9.1 Setup and Preparation
UPS control unit RT1000
COM2 AUX
Ethernet cable*
(cross-over) SNMP-board
LCMS
*) In a wired system, this connection can also be done to the SPU network connector .
Fig. 4-33 LCMS connection to the UPS for configuration of the SNMP card (example)
To connect the SNMP card

1. Connect the LCMS via a crossover cable with the SNMP card of the UPS (see Fig. 4-33).
2. Switch on the LCMS and wait for booting and login as supervisor.
3. Open a terminal window.
4. Check the IP address of LCMS by typing: ”/sbin/ifconfig”

5. Result should be: 'IP=192.168.23.2' (example IP).
6. Change the IP address to '10.10.10.10' as follows:

S Type ”system-config-network” <Enter>
S Enter root password : ”12lcms21”
S Double-click on 'eth0'
S Change address to '10.10.10.10' and click 'OK'
S Click button 'Deactivate' (click in the next two windows on 'OK')
S Click button 'Activate' to save the changes
S Close the window
7. Send a ping to the SNMP card, type: ”ping 10.10.10.10” <Enter>. Wait for an answer.
8. To stop the answers press <CTRL+C>.
10. Select 'Run Program' and type ”firefox” <Enter>.

The Firefox web browser will appear with a blank page (see Fig. 4-34).
NOTE: Other Internet browser can also be used, e.g. Internet Explorer, Opera etc.; example here: Firefox.
11. Enter the IP address ”10.10.10.10” to the URL line and press 'OK'.
Fig. 4-34 Firefox browser (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-47

4.4.9.2 Configuration
1. Select the item 'UPS Model & System' on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-35) (see
Fig. 4-35). The window for the HTTP administrator login will appear (see Fig. 4-36).
Fig. 4-35 UPS Adapter Configuration Mode (example)

2. Enter the user name ”admin” and the password ”cs121-snmp”. Click 'OK'.
admin
cs121-snmp
Fig. 4-36 Administrator login for configuration (example)
4.4.9.2.1 Settings of Model & System
1. The following settings must be made:

S UPS Model: select the used type and the correct number of external battery packs used:
'XANTO RT1000' or 'XANTO RT2000+1 Batt'
S The items at the left side will be normally filled in automatically.
S At the right side fill in all relevant items like System Name, System Location, System Contact,
Attached Devices and the Battery Installation Date (Fig. 4-37 shows an example).
4-48 Ed. 10.13

XANTO RT2000 +1Batt

1400 ax680upsB
1400 Ajaccio
20
18 AX680, Dualized Ground St
2400 21.06.2009
Serial
Fig. 4-37 UPS Model & System settings (example)
4.4.9.2.2 Settings of the Network&Security

1. Select the item 'Network & Security' on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-35).
2. The following settings must be made (example see Fig. 4-38):
- Local address (192.168.24.215 for the first UPS, 192.168.24.216 for the second UPS etc.),
- Gateway address (192.168.24.254), Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0).
- Change administrator password to ”12ups21”. Confirm password. For the UpsMon & SS4
password click 'Clear'. Click on checkbox 'Use UpsMon Password for Web Pages'.
NOTE: Remember the password, because you must start the procedure from beginning
(default settings).
Fig. 4-38 Network & Security settings (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-49

4.4.9.2.3 Settings of SNMP
1. Select the item 'SNMP' on the left side of the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-35).
The window 'SNMP Settings' will appear (see Fig. 4-39).
2. Perform the following settings in order to establish UPS communication:
'Address', 'Community', 'Permission'.
3. After filling in all items, click 'Apply'.
Fig. 4-39 SNMP settings (example)
4.4.9.2.4 Settings of COM2 & AUX, TempMan
1. Select the item 'COM2 & AUX' on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-35).
2. Perform the following COM2 setting (see Fig. 4-40):
COM2 Mode 'SM_T_COM'
3. After entering the required setting, click 'Apply'.
4. Perform the following AUX setting (see Fig. 4-40):
AUXPort 4 is set for 'Use as Input', if it is not marked for 'Use as Output'.
COM2 setting
AUX setting
not marked
Fig. 4-40 Settings of COM2 & AUX (example)
4-50 Ed. 10.13

6. If a temperature sensor is connected to the COM2 connector, perform the following TempMan set
ting (example see Fig. 4-41). The setting depends on the used sensor:
Sensor Location 'Temperature Sensor 1', Threshold (Low) '0.0' and (High) '100.0' (example)
TempMan setting
Fig. 4-41 Settings of TempMan (example)
4.4.9.2.5 Saving the Configuration
1. Select the item 'Save Configuration' on the left side in the 'Configuration' list (Fig. 4-35).
The window 'CS121 Configuration Manager' appears (see Fig. 4-43).
2. Select the 'Save Configuration' function on the right side of the window (Fig. 4-43). The following
window appears (see Fig. 4-42):
Fig. 4-42 Save Configuration (example)
Fig. 4-43 CS121 Configuration Manager (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-51

3. Click the 'OK' button and wait until the changes are written to the flash memory (working cursor
is shown). Click 'Reboot'. The following window (Fig. 4-44) appears:
Fig. 4-44 Reboot the adapter (example)
4. Click the 'OK' button and wait until the adapter has been rebooted (working cursor is shown).
Wait at least 180 s and then click 'Reload'.
5. Reset the IP address of LCMS to the original value (shown in section 4.4.9.1 d).
For the procedure, refer to section 4.4.9.1 e).
4.4.9.3 Normal Operation
The next step is to change the adapter to normal operation.
1. Switch the UPS to 'OFF'.
2. Disconnect the UPS from main power.
3. Remove the SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30' Pro from the UPS control unit.
4. Change the DIP-switch 1 to 'ON' and 2 to 'OFF' (see Fig. 4-32).
5. Insert the SNMP card 'DW5SNMP30' Pro again.
6. Connect the UPS to the main power.
7. Switch the UPS to 'ON'.
Select 'Run Program' and type ”firefox”, click <Enter>.
9. Enter in the URL line the IP address you set during the configuration phase (see section 4.4.9.2.2
'Settings of the network') and click <Enter>.
10. Wait until the adapter has finished booting. The following window with the UPS status appears.
4-52 Ed. 10.13

Fig. 4-45 Normal Operation, UPS Status (example)
4.4.9.4 Reconfiguring the UPS
1. To change the settings of the UPS adapter, enter from normal operation into the configuration
menu of the UPS adapter.
2. After changing the entries within a window, click on 'Apply' before you change to the next
configuration menu point.
NOTE: Don't forget to save the new configuration as described in section 4.4.9.2.5 'Save
Configuration'.
Ed. 10.13 4-53

4.4.10 CS121 WDP - Watchdog & Power Manager (Option)
Product Description
CS121 WDP is an optional watchdog & power manager piggyback board for the SNMP adapter of
the CS121/BACS series. It is a separate chipset which can be attached to a SNMP adapter and it
works as a hardware watchdog to reset (cold boot) the processor if a heartbeat signal is not received
in an interval of 60 seconds.
Mounting the power manager on an SNMP adapter is only necessary, if the SNMP adapter does not
start when initiating the UPS installation e.g. after a mains outage. How to recognize: neither the green
LED nor the red LED are lit. This is only valid for 16 MB device versions.
Watchdog function
The watchdog starts 5 minutes after the SNMP adapter has rebooted. If then the watchdog does not
receive an alive signal from the processor within 120 seconds, it will disconnect the power supply for
a reset.
Power manager function

This device checks the input input voltage at the SNMP adapter. The device blocks the processor
startup on the SNMP adapter of the until the power supply is stabilized and the input voltage at the
SNMP adapter has reached at least 8 Volt
This avoids startup problems connected with non-stabilized power supplies or other power supply
problems in UPS slots. Thus, the SNMP adapter will start properly.
Fig. 3-48 SNMP adapter with installed power manager CS121 WDP - view from top (example)
4-54 Ed. 10.13

Mounting the optional power manager piggyback board on the CS121 board
CAUTION
Be sure that the power supply is disconnected before starting the mounting works.
Plug the CS121WDP piggyback board on the SNMP adapter board like shown in Fig. 3-49. The pig
gyback board runs without any configuration and starts its functions immediately after connection.
For using the watchdog features, a firmware release FW 4.28 or higher is required. The power man
ager function is not depending on any firmware level.
NOTE: The SNMP adapter must always start, if plugged out or plugged in while the UPS installa
tion is in operation, irrespective whether a power manager is installed or not.
Fig. 3-49 CS121 WDP piggyback board mounted on the SNMP adapter - 4 different views
Ed. 10.13 4-55

4.4.11 List of DIP-FIX-Switches and Jumpers

4.4.11.1 General
Some of the AX 680 SPU subassemblies have jumpers on the component side. The jumpers act either
as on/off switches or as changeover switches. The jumpers can be set or placed to particular posi
tions in order to adapt universal subassemblies to specific equipment types. Before installing a spare
subassembly, check and correct, if necessary, the position of the jumpers.
Overview of subassemblies containing DIP-FIX switches and jumpers:
No. Subassembly Short name Reference number
1 Signal Processing Board (1090 MHz) SPB3 83142 74200
2 Position and Time Module PTM 120703-0001
open set
MPC
Reset/Flash write
enable RX IF stage
X6
ETH NET1/2
ADC
Flash
OS/APP
FPGA
X13
DC to LNA
RX RF stage
Local oscillator
MPC
TT IF stage (b)
DPR RAM
TT IF stage (a)
RX RF stage
1090 MHz
TT RF stage
X9
LED
X9/1 X9/2 X8 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
LED
Reset RX FAIL DC
TX TT
MAINT ETH2 TXU control Status In BITE Maintenance TT out RF in
digital to other GS Laptop Video out
JUMPER POSITION DEFINITION REMARKS

X13 set 12 VDC to RX antenna enabled -
open 12 VDC to RX antenna disabled default
X6 set MPC Reset/Flash write enable default
open - -
1 Signal Processing Board (SPB3) 83142 74200 1 of 1
NOTE: If the receiving antenna is used without an active amplifier unit (default), or other equipment is connected to it, jumper X13 is open.
4-56 Ed. 10.13

open set
7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1
3 1
4 2 J9 J7
8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2
J1 3 1
J3 4 2
3 1
4 2 1 2
J2 3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
J10
RX-module 2 RX-module 1 RF power divider
LED LED LED LED LED

120703-0001 X1
Position Fail Time Fail PPS Antenna RF in LNA DC

J1 BITE function:
1-2 set BITE measurement voltage +3.3 V internal default setting
2-4 set BITE measurement voltage external in factory use/test purpose
J2 BITE function:
1-2 set BITE measurement voltage +5 V internal default setting
2-4 set BITE measurement voltage external in factory use/test purpose
J3 BITE function:
1-2 set BITE measurement antenna current internal default setting
2-4 set BITE measurement volt./current external in factory use/test purpose
J7 Signal path RX-Module 1 outgoing signal:
1-2 set - default setting

open test purpose factory use
7-8 set spare -
open spare -
2 Position and Time Module (PTM) 120703-0001 1 of 2
Ed. 10.13 4-57


J9 Signal path RX module 2 outgoing signal:

7-8 set spare -
open spare -
J10 Antenna voltage selection:
1-2 set +3.3 V -

open - -
3-4 set - -
open -
5-6 set +5 V default setting
open - -
7-8 set - -
open - -
9-10 set +12 V -
open - -
2 Position and Time Module (PTM) 120703-0001 2 of 2
4-58 Ed. 10.13

4.5 DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE (DSO)
After storing the sampled data at the ground station, the RCMS signal analyser can be used to retrieve
the file and to analyse the recorded signal in amplitude and spectrum using a graphical user interface.
The Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) is divided into two parts: One DSO part belongs to the MAGS
software application and the other DSO part operates on the ground station's Signal Processing Unit
(SPU) or, more exactly, on the SPB3(A) board between the RF front-end / signal reception section
and the FPGA section.
The program is situated on a Linux PC used as Remote Control and Monitoring System (RCMS) or
Local Control Monitoring System (LCMS) in a network that connects the MLAT / ADS-B ground sta
tions to a client application.
4.5.1 DSO Section on the SPB3 Board

Each MLAT / ADS-B ground station receives transponder signals from aircraft, decodes them and
forwards extracted target reports to downstream client systems. The part of the ground station that
is responsible for this activity is referred to as Signal Processing Board (3rd Generation) or SPB3(A).
There are three different SPB3(A) versions that take care of its three different roles corresponding to
the different signal characteristics in terms of frequency, modulation and encoding on each channel:
S 1090 MHz
S 1030 MHz
S UAT (978 MHz)
The SPB3(A) samples received signals in the complex base band with the following characteristics:
S Sampling frequency: 36 MHz
S Sampling Resolution: 16 Bit
S Sample Length: 1 ms
The detected signal noise level as well as the perceived signal power level are provided by the
SPB3(A) as well.
Fig. 4-46 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (DSO) screen (example)
Ed. 10.13 4-59

SPB3(A) provides the following trigger conditions:
S Signal Threshold
S Message Format
S 24 bit target address
S CRC Error (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
S No signal (power level is less than the given threshold for a given time)
S Quality Criterion not satisfied
S Mode 1/2/3/A/C detected (only 1090 or 1030)
Upon manual user action on the DSO, one SPB3 is selected for action. Then the specific SPB3(A)
trigger condition is configured and the trigger is armed for single-shot acquisition. After taking sam
ples, the SPB3(A) notifies the DSO that samples can be retrieved. The DSO then downloads the
sampled data as a data file via the ground network. The DSO stores the data file to hard disk and
displays its contents in a graphical user interface. Stored data can be retrieved and compared to those
just acquired.
4.5.1.1 DSO Software-Based Operation

The software-based operation of the DSO tool is described in detail in the Technical Manual Part 2
'MLAT/ADS-B Software AX/BX 680', Annex D.
4.5.1.2 DSO Roles
The DSO roles are:
S to provide a graphical user interface to remotely control the DSO function within the SPB3(A) board
S setting the trigger conditions and downloading the sampled data,
S to provide a graphical user interface to analyze and display the sampled data,
S to provide a graphical user interface to store sampled data and settings to RCMS/LCMS hard disk.
The DSO is a program with Graphical User Interface (GUI) to display sampled received signal data
from remote ground station's Signal Processing Board SPB3(A).
The software implementation is necessary to replace the need of separate digital oscilloscopes or
Spectrum Analyzers. The SPB3(A) stores its data digitally so there is no analog output for a separate
digital oscilloscope or a standard Spectrum Analyzer. The digital data also contains more information
that can be displayed (complete complex signal).
Within each ground station, the signal processing board SPB3(A) has a DSO function sampling the
complex base band signal.
4-60 Ed. 10.13

4.5.1.3 DSO Signal Processing

The storage oscilloscope records received output values from the complex baseband (Matched Fil
ter) or from AD-converter; see Fig. 4-47.
Values from the Ring Buffer enable recording samples before trigger events. Address and length man
agement for separate recording of multiple trigger events is supported. The start address and the
length of stored data can be set via register. Data are recorded at a sampling frequency of 36 MHz.
The data are stored in an external SDRAM. The SDRAM stores 96 MB of data managed by a SDRAM
controller. This corresponds to a maximum length of more than 460 ms.
The storage oscilloscope can be triggered by different sources (registers). Stored data can be read
out by the CPU.
RX antenna Signal Processing Board Architecture

RF SPB3(A)
signal Ethernet
Complex Baseband FPGA
RF front-end / reception Processor
Signal
RF Filtering Analog-Digital Digital Signal Processing
(1090 ES / UAT / 1030) Conversion (1090 ES / UAT / 1030)
Downconversion Digital Storage TOA / TOT

(1090 ES / UAT / 1030) Osciloscope (DSO) Clocks and Synchronization Console
GPS-UTC
Interface Test Signal Generation Memory
(1090 ES / UAT / 1030)
RF frontend / reception (test transmitter)

RF
signal Switch Upconversion
Intern / Extern (1090 ES/UAT/1030)
Buffering
(1090 ES/UAT/1030)
Transmitter State
Machine
TX CTL
Buffer
Digital I/F
Fig. 4-47 SPB3(A), principal signal processing board architecture
4.5.1.4 DSO Feature List

General Objective of the DSO Tool
The DSO function within the MAGS software samples data if a configurable trigger condition is satis
fied:
Source Selection and Identification of Items
Upon manual user action on the DSO tool, one SPB3(A) board is selected for action. The provided
data information is displayed on the RCMS screen.
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
The DSO tool provides a graphical user interface to configure the sampling trigger for the
SPB3(A)-based DSO function and presentation of the RF signals.
Ed. 10.13 4-61

Communication
Upon successful trigger action, the DSO is able to receive a data file in binary format via the attached
data network.
Envelope View
The Envelope graph enables the representation of Storage Oscilloscope data (Envelope or ”Video”),
i.e. normalized in a way to represent the absolute value of the complex signal.
Note: A View contains the actual graph or both graph (actual and old), legend, scale and title of the
graph.
Spectrum Analyzer View

The Spectrum Analyzer graph is the representation of the signal frequency spectrum similar to the
display of a Spectrum Analyzer (requires Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT) of the complex signal).
Complex Signal View

The Complex graph is a representation of the complete complex signal in two dimensions (Time and
Ticks). This does not require processing of the signal and is therefore a pure graphical representation.
NOTE: This graph provides means to verify correctness or plausibility of the other two represen
tations (Envelope View, Spectrum Analyzer View).
Fig. 4-48 Examples of DSO diagrams
4-62 Ed. 10.13

ADS-B AX 680 Part1 HW EN 10.13

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADS-B AX 680 Part1 HW EN 10.13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reference No.

As for details, the electrical and mechanical information given in the

All rights reserved

STRUCTURE OF THE TECHNICAL MANUALS

Part Technical Manual Reference no.

REFERENCED DOCUMENTS TO PART 1

[1] User Manual of ONLINE XANTO XS 1000R (option) / ONLINE USV-Systeme AG

Ed. 10.13 Info-1

PDM Manual Major Modifications

Info-2 Ed. 10.13

TECHNICAL SUPPORT AND HANDLING REPLACEMENT PARTS

Ed. 10.13 Info-3

This page is intentionally left blank.

Info-4 Ed. 10.13

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This Technical Manual uses the following typographic conventions:

TABLE OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Pages Ed. Remarks

CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4.13 Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Statements . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Ed. 10.13 III

3.1.9 Installation Cabling of the 48 V DC Ground Station Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

3.3.1 Status of the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

4.2.1 Damage Check/Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Ed. 10.13 VII

4.4.8.2 Exchanging the UPS Control Unit Xanto RT2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

VIII Ed. 10.13

Ed. 10.13 AV-1

CMS Control and Monitoring System

AV-2 Ed. 10.13

Ed. 10.13 AV-3

LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LNA Low Noise Amplifier

AV-4 Ed. 10.13

Ed. 10.13 AV-5

SIS Signal In Space

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

AV-6 Ed. 10.13

TXB Transmitter Module Box

Ed. 10.13 AV-7

AV-8 Ed. 10.13

RX GPS RX RX GPS RX RX GPS RX RX GPS RX

ADS-B GS-R GS-R GS-R GS-R

Ground Station Data

ADS-B LAN A ADS-B LAN A

ATC Center ATC Center

Fig. 1-1 System overview ADS-B (configuration example)

Ed. 10.13 1-1

Example Data Sources Aircraft ADS-B Ground station ATC room

Fig. 1-2 ADS-B interaction with aircraft and ATC (example)

1-2 Ed. 10.13

1.1.2 Major Assemblies

AX 680 Signal Processing Unit (SPU) 19” rack

ATC room communication network

Test transmission (optional)

Fig. 1-3 Ground Station, basic system components (example)

Ed. 10.13 1-3

ADS-B receiving antenna

AX 680 SPU Ground Station A Ground Station B

1-4 Ed. 10.13

UPS (internal battery pack) LAN

ADS-B Ground Station AX 680 ADS-B RX antenna